JP2018171157A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide an improved game machine in terms of performing a presentation of ball entrances to passage means.SOLUTION: A movable presentation member 2360 for limiting a period during which game balls can pass through an extended floor part 2331e is arranged in a flow-down route where the game balls flow down to the extended floor part 2331e. Therefore, it is possible to change winning efficiency to a sensor S and a second sensor S2 without changing ball entrance efficiency to a specific winning port 65a. Consequently, change in the winning efficiency can be generated in a state where the fact that change is generated in the winning efficiency concealed from a player.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 29

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  There is a gaming machine in which the winning efficiency at the entrance is changed by changing the opening / closing width of the opening / closing means for opening / closing the entrance (passing means) (Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-220731 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement in directing the entrance to the entrance.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be improved in terms of directing a ball to the entrance.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a launching device that launches a game ball toward a game area, passing means configured to allow the game ball to pass, An opening / closing means that is displaced between an open position that allows passage and a closed position where a game ball cannot pass through the passage means, and a drive means that drives the opening / closing means, wherein the passing means A detection means configured to detect a game ball that has passed through, and a game ball that has passed through the pass means configured to flow down, coupled to the detection means, and the passed game ball is detected by the detection means. A flow path, and a restriction unit configured to be able to act on the game balls in the flow path and restricting a period during which the game ball can pass through the flow path.

  A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the restricting means changes a flow path width of the flow-down path.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the restricting means is configured to be drivable by a driving force of the driving means, and the driving start time of the opening / closing means and the restriction It is different from the driving start time of the means.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to improve in terms of producing a ball entering the passing means.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the flow-down mode of the game ball in the flow-down path can be changed by the restriction means.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the game machine can be further improved in terms of producing a ball entering the passing means.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front exploded perspective view of a game board and a board surface lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a game board and a board surface lower unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a game board and a board surface lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a back disassembled perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is a top view of the variable winning device, (b) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (c) is a side view of the variable winning device in the direction of the arrow Xc in FIG. 10 (b). is there. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus in the XIa-XIa line | wire of FIG.10 (b), (b) is the variable prize-winning apparatus after sliding the movable upper cover member from Fig.11 (a). It is sectional drawing. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a game board. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the board surface lower unit along line XIIIa-XIIIa in FIG. 12 (b), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the board surface lower unit along line XIIIb-XIIIb in FIG. 12 (b); (C) is sectional drawing of the board surface lower unit which changed the arrangement | positioning of the light irradiation part virtually from FIG.13 (b). (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second per-random number counter and the hit in the normal symbol. It is a front exploded perspective view of a game board and a board surface lower unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a game board and a board surface lower unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a game board and a board surface lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a back disassembled perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is a top view of the variable winning device, (b) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (c) is a side view of the variable winning device in the direction of arrow XXc in FIG. 20 (b). is there. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus in the XXI-XXI line of FIG.20 (b). (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in the XXa-XXa line of FIG.20 (b), (b) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in the XXb-XXb line of FIG.20 (b). (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in the XXa-XXa line of FIG.20 (b), (b) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in the XXb-XXb line of FIG.20 (b). (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in the XXa-XXa line of FIG.20 (b), (b) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in the XXb-XXb line of FIG.20 (b). (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in the XXa-XXa line of FIG.20 (b), (b) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in the XXb-XXb line of FIG.20 (b). (A)-(c) is the figure which showed the time change of the position and state of a movable upper cover member, a solenoid, and a movable production | presentation member. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a game board. (A) And (b) is a partial front perspective view of a game board. It is a partial front perspective view of the game board in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the movable production member in the tilted state, (b) is a side view of the movable production member in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. 30 (a), and (c) is FIG. It is a top view of the movable production | presentation member in the arrow XXXc direction view of (a), (d) is a side view of the movable production | presentation member in the standing state in the arrow XXXb direction view of FIG. 30 (a). (A) to (c) is a schematic top view schematically showing a movable effect member, a distribution part, an extended floor part, and a guide inclined surface. It is the figure which showed the time change of the output of the movement upper cover member in a 1st operation pattern, a solenoid, a movable production | presentation member, a sensor, a 2nd sensor, a control valve, and a V winning sensor. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the jackpot type in a special symbol. It is a front perspective view in the look which looked up from the downward direction of the variable prize-winning apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view in the line of sight which looked up from the downward direction of a movable upper cover member. (A) is a front view of a moving upper cover member, (b) is sectional drawing of the moving upper cover member in the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line | wire of Fig.36 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus in the line corresponding to the XXI-XXI line of FIG.20 (b). It is a back perspective view of a switching device. (A) to (c) are side views of the switching device, the first transmission member, the second transmission member, and the movable effect member schematically showing the operations of the switching device, the first transmission member, the second transmission member, and the movable effect member. It is a schematic diagram. (A) to (c) are side views of the switching device, the first transmission member, the second transmission member, and the movable effect member schematically showing the operations of the switching device, the first transmission member, the second transmission member, and the movable effect member. It is a schematic diagram. It is the figure which showed the time change of the position and state of a moving upper cover member, a solenoid, and a movable production | presentation member. It is the figure which showed the time change of the output of the movement upper cover member in a 2nd operation pattern, a solenoid, a movable production | presentation member, a sensor, and a 2nd sensor. It is the figure which showed the time change of the output of the movement upper cover member in the other example 1 of a 2nd operation pattern, a movable production | presentation member, a sensor, and a 2nd sensor. It is the figure which showed the time change of the output of the movement upper cover member in the other example 2 of a 2nd operation pattern, a movable production | presentation member, a sensor, and a 2nd sensor. It is a front view of a game board. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM in the main controller. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st random number table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st classification selection table. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit classification selection table. It is a back surface perspective view of the switching apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) to (c) are side views of the switching device, the first transmission member, the second transmission member, and the movable effect member schematically showing the operations of the switching device, the first transmission member, the second transmission member, and the movable effect member. It is a schematic diagram. (A) to (c) are side views of the switching device, the first transmission member, the second transmission member, and the movable effect member schematically showing the operations of the switching device, the first transmission member, the second transmission member, and the movable effect member. It is a schematic diagram. It is the figure which showed the time change of the movement upper cover member, solenoid, and movable production | generation member in a 3rd operation pattern. It is a front exploded perspective view of the board surface lower unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a board surface lower unit. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a game board. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a movable effect member and a load generator. (A) is a left view of a 1st clutch member, (b) is a top view of the 1st clutch member in the arrow LVIIIb direction view of Fig.58 (a). (A) is a right view of a 2nd clutch member, (b) is a top view of the 2nd clutch member in the arrow LIXb direction view of Fig.59 (a). (A) to (c) are right side views of the movable effect member and the second clutch member showing the operations of the movable effect member and the second clutch member in time series, and (d) to (f) are respectively It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the attitude | position of the 1st clutch member and 2nd clutch member which are shown to Fig.60 (a) from FIG.60 (c). (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of the 1st clutch member and 2nd clutch member in the arrow LXIa direction view of FIG.60 (b), (c) is the arrow LXIc direction of FIG.60 (c). It is a front perspective view of the 1st clutch member and the 2nd clutch member in view. It is the figure which showed the time change of the movement upper cover member in a 4th operation pattern, a solenoid, a movable production | presentation member, and a 2nd clutch member. It is the figure which showed the time change of the movement upper cover member in a 5th operation pattern, a solenoid, a movable production | presentation member, and a 2nd clutch member. It is the figure which showed the time change of the output of the movement upper cover member in a 6th action pattern, a solenoid, a movable production | presentation member, a 2nd clutch member, and a sensor. It is the figure which showed the time change of the output of the movement upper cover member in a 7th operation pattern, a solenoid, a movable production | presentation member, a 2nd clutch member, and a sensor. It is the figure which showed the time change of the movement upper cover member in the 8th operation pattern, a solenoid, a movable production | presentation member, and a 2nd clutch member. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the jackpot type in a special symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the jackpot classification and the state of the movable production | presentation member in a round game. It is the figure which showed the time change of the output of the movement upper cover member in a 9th action pattern (non-V), a solenoid, a movable production | presentation member, a 2nd clutch member, a sensor, and a 3rd sensor. It is the figure which showed the time change of the output of the movement upper cover member in a 9th action pattern (V), a solenoid, a movable production | generation member, a 2nd clutch member, a sensor, and a 3rd sensor. It is the figure which showed the time change of the output of the movement upper cover member in the another example of the 9th operation pattern (V), a solenoid, a movable production | generation member, a 2nd clutch member, a sensor, and a 3rd sensor. It is the figure which showed the time change of the output of the movement upper cover member, a solenoid, a movable production | presentation member, a 2nd clutch member, a sensor, and a 3rd sensor in a 10th action pattern (lower passage). It is the figure which showed the time change of the output of the movement upper cover member, a solenoid, a movable production | presentation member, a 2nd clutch member, a sensor, and a 3rd sensor in a 10th operation pattern (upper passage).

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 14, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the following description, the front side of the paper is the front (front) side and the back side of the paper is the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is left (left) ) Side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails (not shown), winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when a ball (also called a game ball or a pachinko ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a panel surface lower unit 300 having a variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 6), a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. And the peripheral part is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (refer FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63 and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like. The first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable winning device 330 are integrally formed with the board surface lower unit 300 fitted into a receiving opening 60a of the base plate 60 described later.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 are won, and the ball passes through the through gate 67. A normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and the special symbol big hit is determined. In that case, the jackpot type is also determined.

  In this pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as the probable change state of the special symbol), 60 minutes. A special symbol jackpot is determined with a probability of 1. For convenience of explanation, the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first winning slot 64 is referred to as “special symbol 1 lottery”, and the special symbol lottery performed for the second winning entrance 640 is performed. The symbol lottery is referred to as “special symbol 2 lottery”.

  When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) The opening operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In the present embodiment, control is performed so that 15 prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the specific prize opening 65a.

  Note that there are six types of special symbol jackpot types: “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot C”, “jackpot a”, “jackpot b”, and “jackpot c” (FIG. 14). reference). Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a is controlled to be different depending on the type of jackpot.

  When the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variation display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entering the ball is a maximum of 4 for each type of winning port. The number of balls held is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first winning port 64 (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second winning port 640 (special symbol 2) If the number of reserved balls) remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. When both the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  In the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol), whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When the normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened for a predetermined time, and the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640, and as a result, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  When the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 4), and the normal result indicating the lottery result after a predetermined time has elapsed. The symbol is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable symbol display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is retained up to four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. It is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84 (see FIG. 4). When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. The

  In this embodiment, as a value added after the end of the jackpot, a special symbol probability change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the special gaming state ends, and the special symbol lottery is After 100 times, it is configured to be set to the normal state.

  In this embodiment, when the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the special gaming state is finished, the probability change state of the special symbol is ended according to the number of times of the special symbol lottery. For example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a to be described later), from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 May be shifted to a high probability state of a special symbol (during special symbol change). In this case, even after the jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c, which will be described later), it may be configured to be in a short time state of a normal symbol until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. good.

  Note that the number of lotteries for special symbols to which the above-described special symbol probability variation state (high probability state) is given is not limited to 100. For example, it may be 50 times less than 100 times or 200 times more than 100 times.

  In addition, the number of lotteries for the special symbol that becomes the short time state of the normal symbol described above is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probability is changing), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a game state that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol in this embodiment (during the probability change of the special symbol) includes a game state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  On the other hand, the “special symbol low probability state” means a time when the special symbol is not being probable, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that during the special symbol probabilistic change.

  In addition, the normal symbol time-short state (short time medium) means a game state in which the normal symbol hit probability is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  In addition, the normal state means a game state (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the normal symbol (second symbol) hit probability is increased) that is neither the probability change of the special symbol nor the short time of the normal symbol.

  During the probabilistic change of the special symbol and the normal symbol time, not only does the probability of hitting the normal symbol increase, but the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning prize opening 640 is also changed to the normal state. A long time is set in comparison. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 in comparison with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 during the special symbol change or the normal symbol time. That is, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 during the special symbol change or the normal symbol time reduction, You may comprise so that the frequency | count of open | release of the electrically-driven accessory 640a in the case of winning a normal symbol may be increased rather than a normal state.

  In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not changed during the probability change of the special symbol or the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning prize opening 640 is opened, and the electric It is good also as what changes at least one among the frequency | count of opening of the accessory 640a.

  In addition, during the change of probability of the special symbol or during the short time of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released are not changed, and the normal symbol (first It may be configured that only the hit probability of (2 symbols) is increased compared to the normal state.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a symbol that is out of place, by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger A second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 4) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result of a special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. The jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit B”, “big hit C”, “big hit b”, “big hit c”, even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added. A variable display with the main symbols aligned is performed. On the other hand, if “big hit A” or “big hit a”, any number among all the numbers “0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9” including an odd number is added. Fluctuation display in which main symbols to which are added is aligned is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  Next, a display (hitting method navigation) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and prompts the user to strike a ball aiming at the right or left path (flow path) of the game board 13 will be described.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is changed or the normal symbol is in a short-time state. By hitting (right-handed), it becomes easy to stably enter the ball into the second winning opening 640. In addition, as will be described in detail later, when a special symbol lottery (the lottery of special symbol 2) is performed based on the ball entering the second winning port 640, the first winning port 64 Compared to the case where a special symbol lottery (the special symbol 1 lottery) is performed based on the fact that a ball has entered, it is likely to be a big hit (big hit a) where the maximum profit can be obtained.

  Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed hitting in the probability change state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot or the short time state of the normal symbol. In other words, even if the probability change state of the special symbol or the short time state of the normal symbol is set, the ball cannot be stably entered into the second winning opening 640 unless the player hits the right. Therefore, the player may not be able to receive the benefits of the special symbol probable state or the normal symbol time-short state sufficiently.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the player can display a specific image (right-handed navigation) in the special symbol probability change state or the normal symbol time reduction state, thereby allowing the player to display the special symbol probability change state or the normal symbol time reduction state. It is configured to ensure that the benefits of becoming

  In right-handed navigation, the characters “Aim for the right !!” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the characters. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13.

  In addition, when it is advantageous for the player by playing the jackpot game with the left-handed game, in the present embodiment, by displaying a specific image (left-handed navigation), the player mistakenly hits the right-handed game. The game is prevented from being played, and the player can easily obtain the benefit obtained by left-handed.

  In the left-handed navigation, the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters “Aim for the left !!” and three left-pointing arrows above and below the characters. By displaying these letters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the left side of the game board 13.

  The second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 4) displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67. Fluctuation display in which the lights are alternately turned on for a predetermined time is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol “◯” after displaying the variation of the second symbol. If the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a period of time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 4) displays a variation. If the winning lottery result is a winning lottery, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variation display stop symbol. If the result of is out of the range, a symbol of “x” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of reserved balls, which is the number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere, is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and is also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84 (see FIG. 4). Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 4), as in the present embodiment. 37A, 37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp 84 (see FIG. 4) may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a provided in the second winning port 640, and the game ball can always win.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability of winning a jackpot that gives the maximum profit (for example, a ball to be played) as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is the first winning opening when the ball wins the second winning slot 640. It is set higher than the case where the ball has won 64.

  Accordingly, during normal times, the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, so that the first winning opening 64 without the electric winning combination is reached. Toward the left of the variable display device unit 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “left-handed”). It is advantageous for the player to aim to be.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit a by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, aiming at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or setting the second winning port 640 by “left-handed”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 6) is disposed below the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640, and a specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done. Although details of the variable prize winning device 330 (see FIG. 6) for opening and closing the specific prize winning opening 65a will be described later, in brief description, the moving upper lid member 332 of the variable prize winning device 330 slides, so that the specific prize winning opening 65a is changed. Opened and closed (switched between an open state in which the game ball flowing down the moving upper lid member 332 reaches the front side of the specific winning port 65a and a closed state other than the open state in which the specific winning port 65a can be passed. ).

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 314. A sphere that flows down the game area and has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 314. A pair of out ports 314 are arranged on the left and right of the specific winning port 65a.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged (not shown).

  In this embodiment, about 10% of the game balls fired in the normal state go to the general winning opening 63, and about 10% flow down on the pegs (not shown) and enter the first winning opening 64. After the remaining approximately 80% flows down on the road peg, it leaks from the first winning port 64 and rolls on a moving upper lid member 332 described later and passes through the out port 314. That is, when the game balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the game balls reach the moving upper lid member 332 at intervals of about 0.75 seconds. In this case, since it is possible to always maintain one or more game balls on the upper surface of the movable upper lid member 332, even if the opening time of the movable upper lid member 332 is short, the game balls are designated as the specific winning opening 65a. Can be made to flow down.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a movable upper lid member 332 that opens and closes a specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid (solenoid 2333) for driving the motor and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To do.

  The specific winning opening 65a may be opened / closed by driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  Sensors that detect game balls, such as a sensor S, a second sensor S2, a third sensor S3, and a V winning sensor VC described later, are included in the various switches 208.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 510 described later.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 13, the board surface lower unit 300 disposed in the lower part of the game board 13 will be described. 5 and 6 are front exploded perspective views of the game board 13 and the board surface lower unit 300, and FIG. 7 is a rear exploded perspective view of the game board 13 and the board lower unit 300. 5 shows a state in which only the front plate member 320 is disassembled from the game board 13, and in FIGS. 6 and 7, the front unit 310 and the variable winning device 330 of the board surface lower unit 300 are further played from FIG. The state disassembled from the board 13 is illustrated. In order to facilitate understanding, the game board 13 is illustrated in a simplified manner.

  As shown in FIG. 5, a specific winning opening 65 a is formed along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed in a downwardly convex curved shape, the arrangement position of the specific winning opening 65a is set as compared with the case where the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed by a straight line along the left-right direction. Can be lowered downward. As for the outer edge of the specific winning opening 65a, the upper side is formed by the movable upper lid member 332 (see FIG. 6), the lower side is formed by the lower edge of the inner rail 61, and the left and right sides are the left and right walls of the opening upper portion 313. It is formed with a part.

  As will be described later, the specific winning opening 65a is switched between the above-mentioned closed state and open state by the sliding movement of the movable upper cover member 332 back and forth, and the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is, for example, 15 It can be repeated (15 rounds).

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the board surface lower unit 300 is a unit that constitutes an out port 314 through which a ball is discharged and a specific winning port 65 a, and is drilled in the lower part of the game board 13 in the front-rear direction. A front unit 310 that is fitted and fixed to the receiving opening 60a from the front side, and a front plate member 320 that is fastened and fixed to the front unit 310 from the front side and that has a spherical path formed on the back side; The variable prize-winning device 330 is mainly provided with a movable upper lid member 332 that is fitted into the opening 60a from the back side and fastened and fixed and changes the flow direction of the sphere.

  The front unit 310 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 311 formed so that a sphere can flow down on the front side, and an electric accessory 640a in which a pair of members are opened and closed in the center on the front side of the main body plate portion 311. The plate-shaped inclined plate portion 312 protruding from the front side at the left and right upper portions of the main body plate portion 311, the upper opening portion 313 recessed from the lower bottom portion of the main body plate portion 311, and the upper opening portion thereof It mainly includes a pair of out ports 314 that are drilled in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the portion 313 and from which the balls are discharged out of the game area.

  The main body plate portion 311 is formed in the front-rear direction at a position surrounded by the first winning port lower side 311a that forms the lower side of the first winning port 64 and the upper part of the electric winning combination 640a. A second winning port 640 provided, a light irradiation device 311b that is disposed below the second winning port 640 and illuminates the front side of the second winning port 640, and is directed to the front side in a rib shape outside the out port 314 And a ball-flowing rib 311c that is provided in a protruding manner.

  The light irradiation device 311b is housed in the housing recess 323a (see FIG. 7) of the front plate member 320 and is directed upward (to the second winning port 640 side) due to the ball winning in the second winning port 640. LED member that is irradiated with light.

  Note that the control of the light emission timing of the light irradiation device 311b can be arbitrarily set. For example, when the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, and the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 640, light irradiation that is normally turned off for the purpose of notifying the player of the change in the state You may perform control which makes the apparatus 311b light-emit, or makes the light irradiation apparatus 311b normally lighted out.

  The ball flow rib 311c adjusts the flow direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, and will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  The inclined plate portion 312 is formed such that a ball can roll on the upper side surface, and is disposed on the upper left and right sides of the electric accessory 640a, and is inclined downward as the electric accessory 640a comes closer. As a result, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state where it falls to the left and right, the ball that rolls down by the inclined plate portion 312 can be awarded to the second prize opening 640 with high probability. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the ball that flows down by rolling the inclined plate portion 312 can be dropped to the front side of the upper opening portion 313 with high probability.

  The opening upper part 313 is formed to be inclined upward as it goes to the left and right center. Here, the vertical width of the left and right wall portions of the upper opening portion 313 (corresponding to the left and right wall portions of the specific winning port 65a) is set such that the vertical width of the central portion in the left-right direction of the specific winning port 65a is equal to or greater than the diameter of the sphere. ) Can be set to a length equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 12). In this case, although it is difficult to win a ball from the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a, the ball flows down along the inner rail 61 to the central portion of the game board 13, and the central portion in the left and right direction of the specific winning opening 65a. Since it is possible to win, the game can be continued.

  Here, when the upper and lower side surfaces of the specific prize opening 65a are parallel surfaces (planes extending in the left-right direction), the straight line intersecting the inner rail 61 is the same as the length of the lower side surface of the specific prize opening 65a. It is necessary to arrange the specific winning opening 65a from the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Therefore, the position of the specific winning opening 65a is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lower side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is curved like the lower side surface of the inner rail 61, it is not necessary to raise the specific winning opening 65a, and the specific winning opening 65a is positioned at a low position. Can be arranged.

  In addition, since the upper side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is inclined downward as it approaches the left and right ends, the ball toward the specific winning opening 65a is compared with the case where the upper side surface is formed by a plane extending in the left and right direction. Can be lowered. Thereby, the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered.

  The out port 314 is formed as a pair on the left and right sides of the upper opening portion 313, and the lower side of the out port 314 is disposed below the left and right ends of the upper opening portion 313, and the upper side of the out port 314 is disposed above. The That is, the opening upper part 313 is formed below the out port 314. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning of the variable prize-winning apparatus 330 mentioned later can be lowered | hung below, and the lower edge of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be lowered | hung. Even in such an arrangement, in this embodiment, the sphere is caused to flow down on the upper surface of the movable upper cover member 332 that has an upper surface substantially the same shape as the shape of the upper opening portion 313 and is slid in the front-rear direction. Is discharged to the out port 314 (see FIG. 12), so that the game can be continued.

  The front plate member 320 is a plate-like member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is disposed on the front side of the front unit 310 and formed so that a sphere can flow between the main body plate portion 311. A plate-like main body plate portion 321, a first winning port front portion 322 that is disposed at the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 321 and guides a ball to the lower side 311 a of the first winning port, and an electric accessory 640 a. The electric support lower supporting portion 323, the lower lower plate 324 disposed along the lower surface of the outer port 314, and the rear side of the main body plate 321 along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. And a ball feeding unit 325.

  The main body plate portion 321 is provided with a ball flow rib 321a that is projected in a rib shape on the back side outside the out-out lower plate 324. The ball flow rib 321a adjusts the flow direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The electric accessory lower support portion 323 includes an accommodation recess 323a which is a horizontally elongated recess, and the light irradiation device 311b is accommodated in the accommodation recess 323a.

  The out mouth lower plate 324 is provided with a thin rib extending in the front-rear direction on the upper side surface in the left-right direction. Further, the out-out lower plate 324 includes a stepped portion 324a that protrudes upward at the left and right inner ends. The sphere that has flowed down can be decelerated by the unevenness formed on the upper side surface of the lower plate 324. Moreover, the rib formed in the out mouth lower plate 324 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back side. Thereby, the speed | rate which discharges | releases the ball | bowl which has flowed down to the out port 314 can be improved.

  Since the inclined plate portion 312 described above is formed immediately above the out-out lower plate 324 (see FIG. 12), the ball that falls after rolling the inclined plate portion 312 faces the out-out lower plate 324. Falling is suppressed. That is, a ball that falls after rolling on the inclined plate portion 312 falls on the inner side in the left-right direction of the pair of out-out lower plates 324 (position where the moving upper lid member 332 is disposed), or on the out-out lower plate 324. Either it falls to the outer end (near the ball flow rib 321a and the boundary position between the rib formation range and the rail through which the ball flows). These are both outside the rib forming range. Thereby, it can suppress that a ball | bowl falls from the high place to the out mouth lower board 324, and the durability of the out mouth lower board 324 can be improved.

  The step portion 324a is a step formed between the out port 314 and the specific winning port 65a, and a sphere that flows down from the left and right direction and flows down the upper side surface of the out port lower plate 324 exceeds the step portion 324a. Thus, it is prevented from flowing down to the center in the left-right direction (see FIG. 12). In other words, the sphere that flows down from the left-right direction and flows down the upper side surface of the out-out lower plate 324 is guided exclusively to the out-out port 314.

  The ball feeding unit 325 mainly includes a back side surface 325a formed on the back side, and a left and right side surface 325b connected to the back side surface 325a and formed on the left and right sides.

  The back side surface 325a is inclined downward toward the back side, and the left and right side surfaces 325b are inclined toward the center toward the back side. Thereby, the flow direction of the sphere that has reached the ball feeding portion 325 can be directed to the back side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball from staying in front of the specific winning opening 65a and to suppress so-called over winning.

  Next, the variable winning device 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 330, FIG. 9 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 10A is a top view of the variable winning device 330. 10 (b) is a front view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 10 (c) is a side view of the variable winning device 330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow Xc in FIG. 10 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the variable winning device 330 includes a main body member 331 that forms a skeleton, and a movable upper lid member 332 that is inserted into the main body member 331 from the front and is slidable in the front-rear direction. A rear cover member 334 that houses a solenoid 333 that generates a driving force for sliding the moving upper cover member 332 and a lever member 334b that is swung by the solenoid 333 and that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 331. And mainly.

  The main body member 331 has a deformed through hole 331a through which the movable upper lid member 332 is inserted, a lower passage 331b through which a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows down, and is disposed below and below the lower passage 331b. A light irradiating device 331c that irradiates light and a back side accommodation portion 331d that is a recess formed on the back side toward the front side and that accommodates the solenoid 333, the lever member 334b, and the like. .

  The deformed through-hole 331a is a through-hole formed along the shape of the movable upper lid member 332 as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, and accommodates the front side plate portion 332a. It mainly includes an opening 331a1 and a rear opening 331a2 that accommodates the rear plate 332b.

  The front opening 331a1 is a hollow formed in a pentagonal shape in which the lower side extends horizontally in front view, is inclined upward as the upper side goes to the center, and the left and right sides extend vertically.

  The rear opening 331a2 is an opening that is drilled in a shape in which the left and right portions of the front opening 331a1 are cut off from the center of the rear side of the front opening 331a1. In other words, the outer shape of the lower side and the upper side of the rear opening 331a2 and the outer shape of the lower side and the upper side of the front opening 331a1 are not formed in the front-rear direction but are formed at the surface positions. Thereby, the movable upper cover member 332 can be smoothly guided.

  The lower passage 331b is formed as a pair of left and right so that a sphere can pass (see FIG. 13A), and is formed to protrude downward from the lower edge of the inner rail 61. A sensor S for detecting the passage of the sensor is disposed (see FIG. 10B).

  The light irradiation device 331c is a device that produces an effect by illuminating the lower passage 331b, the plate-like portion 332a1, and the like with light, and is disposed below the inner rail 61 (below the receiving opening 60a). As a result, the devices necessary for the light irradiation device 331c can be disposed below the inner rail 61, so that a space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) can be lowered.

  The light irradiation device 331c includes a light irradiation unit 331c1 that emits light. The light irradiation unit 331c1 is formed as a pair of right and left directly below the lower passage 331b and irradiates light upward.

  The rear side accommodating portion 331d communicates with the front opening 331a1 with the rear opening 331a2 interposed therebetween.

  The movable upper cover member 332 is a long member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a front plate portion 332a accommodated in the front opening 331a1, and a rear plate portion 332b accommodated in the rear opening 331a2. A central rib 332c projecting downward along the central axis of the front plate portion 332a and the rear plate portion 332b, and a connecting hole 332d drilled in the vertical direction at the rear side end of the rear plate portion 332b. Prepare mainly.

  Note that the movable upper lid member 332 may be formed from a non-permeable resin material. In this case, for the player who visually recognizes the specific winning opening 65a from the upper side of the moving upper lid member 332, the visibility of the flow of the game ball to the specific winning opening 65a is determined according to the state of the moving upper lid member 332 (open state or closed state). Depending on the state). In other words, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the open state (retracted state), it flows down to the downstream side of the moving upper lid member 332 as compared with the case where the moving upper lid member 332 is in the closed state (the extended state). The visibility of the game ball to be played can be improved.

  The front plate portion 332a is formed in a plate-like portion 332a1 formed in a manner of rising and inclining toward the central portion in the left-right direction along the shape of the upper side of the front opening portion 331a1, and the plate-like portion 332a1 is formed in the vertical direction. And a guide rib 332a3 projecting downward at the left and right end portions of the plate-like portion 332a1 and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The plate-like portion 332a1 includes a front inclined side surface 332a1f that is formed to be inclined toward the back side as it goes downward (see FIG. 11) and that is recessed toward the back side as it goes toward the center in the left-right direction. The front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be recessed toward the rear side toward the center in the left-right direction, so that when the ball is sandwiched between the front plate member 320 and the front inclined side surface 332a1f, the ball can flow toward the center side. It is possible to prevent the sliding operation of the moving upper lid member 332 from being disturbed by the ball.

  Since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed as a portion that reflects light, as will be described later, a metal film is formed on the front inclined side surface 332a1f or mirror-finished to effectively reflect light. You may do it. In the present embodiment, a tape that reflects light is attached.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 10), the guide rib 332a3 is formed along the left and right side surfaces of the front opening 331a1, and slides with the lower side surface of the front opening 331a1. Thereby, the position shift of the left-right direction at the time of the sliding movement of the movement upper cover member 332 can be suppressed.

  The center rib 332c is formed at a bent portion of the front plate portion 332a formed by bending the plate shape. Thereby, the rigidity of the front side board part 332a can be improved. Further, when the movable upper lid member 332 is slid forward (when the movable upper lid member 332 of the variable prize winning device 330 is in an extended state), the movable upper lid member 332 is fastened to the back side of the opening upper portion 313 (FIG. 11B). )reference). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the moving upper lid member 332 from malfunctioning due to the collision between the central rib 332c and the sphere.

  The connecting hole 332d is a through hole through which the connecting portion 334b4 of the lever member 334b is inserted, and the displacement due to the swinging of the lever member 334b is transmitted to the movable upper cover member 332 (see FIG. 11).

  The solenoid 333 mainly includes a main body 333a serving as a driving source and a hook-shaped hook-shaped member 333b that is disposed below the main body 333a and is moved up and down below the lever member 334b.

  The rear cover member 334 mainly includes a plate-like main body portion 334a and a lever member 334b that is pivotally supported by the main body portion 334a so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

  The lever member 334b includes a main body portion 334b1 extending in the vertical direction, a pair of shaft portions 334b2 protruding in a columnar shape in both left and right directions at the lower end portion of the main body portion 334b1, and supported by the main body portion 334a. At a substantially intermediate position between the pair of shaft portions 334b2, a lower claw portion 334b3 extending below the main body portion 334b1 and capable of accommodating the bowl-shaped member 333b between the main body portion 334b1 and an upper end portion of the main body portion 334b1 And a connecting portion 334b4 that bulges into a columnar shape.

  Next, the sliding movement of the movable upper cover member 332 will be described with reference to FIG. 11A is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 330 along the line XIa-XIa in FIG. 10B, and FIG. 11B slides the movable upper lid member 332 from the state of FIG. 11A. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize apparatus 330 after having made it. 11A illustrates a retracted state in which the movable upper lid member 332 is disposed rearward, and FIG. 11B illustrates an extended state in which the movable upper lid member 332 is disposed forward, In order to facilitate understanding of the path E1, the central rib 332c is partially omitted. Further, in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the inner rail 61 and the front plate member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2) are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, when the movable upper lid member 332 forms a retracted state, the hook-shaped member 333b is disposed upward, and the lever member 334b is tilted backward. In this state, the ball can flow down in front of the variable winning device 330, that is, the ball can be won (opened) in the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 5 and 12).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), when the movable upper cover member 332 forms an extended state, the lever member 334b is pushed downward about the shaft portion 334b2 as the hook member 333b is pressed downward, and the rear surface The moving upper lid member 332 is slid to the front side while being in contact with the side surface of the side accommodating portion 331d. In this state, the ball cannot be won (closed state) at the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 5 and 12).

  In this case, the back side surface of the lower end portion of the hook-shaped member 333b is brought into contact with the end portion of the lower claw portion 334b3 of the lever member 334b in the front-rear direction, so that the swinging of the lever member 334b is mechanically restricted. (The hook-shaped member 333b is disposed in the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3, and the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3 and the moving direction of the hook-shaped member 333b are orthogonal to each other). Accordingly, the driving force of the solenoid 333 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the swing of the lever member 334b is stopped by the driving force of the solenoid 333.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the path | route of the light irradiated from the light irradiation apparatus 331c is demonstrated.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, when the movable upper cover member 332 is in the retracted state, the light emitted upward from the light irradiation part 331c1 reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate-like part 332a1 along the path E1. To do. At this time, the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be inclined toward the back side as it goes downward, so that the light that has been irradiated from below and reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f is reflected toward the front (player side). In this case, the player can visually recognize the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the moving upper lid member 332 as if it is emitting light. Further, since the light reflected by the front inclined side surface 332a1f is projected into the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320, the front plate member 320 can be noted. Thereby, the production capability of the movable upper lid member 332 and the front plate member 320 can be improved.

  Here, when an LED or the like is disposed on the movable upper lid member 332 to cause the movable upper lid member 332 to emit light, the movable upper lid member 332 may be increased in size. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the LED is not disposed on the moving upper lid member 332, the ability of the moving upper lid member 332 as an effect portion is improved while suppressing an increase in the size of the moving upper lid member 332. Can do.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the extended state, the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1 upward along the path E2 and directed toward the front inclined side surface 332a1f It does not reach the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate-like portion 332a1 by being shielded by the. In this case, the light irradiated along the path E1 from the light irradiation part 331c1 reaches the intermediate position of the plate-like part 332a1 of the front side plate part 332a and is transmitted as it is. Therefore, the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 are used. Is seen darkly by the player.

  That is, whether the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1 reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f changes depending on whether the movable upper cover member 332 is in the retracted state or the extended state, and the front plate It changes whether the light projection range E0 of the member 320 is visually recognized brightly. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not it is possible to win a ball at the specific winning opening 65a by confirming the brightness state of the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f or the front plate member 320.

  Therefore, as in this embodiment, since the movable upper lid member 332 slides back and forth, even when it is difficult to grasp the change in the state of the movable upper lid member 332 in front view (FIGS. 12A and 12B). )), It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is possible to win a ball in the specific winning opening 65a by the change in the brightness of the light projection range E0.

  Here, the movable upper lid member 332 is operated to form a closed state that prevents the passage of the ball to the specific winning port 65a and an open state that allows the passage of the ball to the specific winning port 65a ( The brightness state of the light projection range E0 is changed only by the forward / backward slide movement). In other words, since the state of the light projection range E0 is changed only by the operation required for the moving upper cover member 332 to continue the game, no additional mechanism is required. In other words, the movable upper lid member 332 can be used for both the purpose of switching whether or not the sphere can pass through the specific winning opening 65a and the purpose of performing the effect by the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1.

  In addition, when the sphere passes through the lower passage 331b, the light may be reflected by the sphere so that the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c is reflected. In this case, the vicinity of the inner rail 61 (below the light projection range E0 in FIGS. 11A and 12B) can be illuminated brightly in a front view.

  With reference to FIG. 12, the flow of the sphere in the case where the movable upper lid member 332 forms the extended state and the case where the retracted state is formed will be described. FIGS. 12A and 12B are partial front views of the game board 13. 12A shows a case where the movable upper lid member 332 forms an extended state (see FIG. 11B). In FIG. 12B, the movable upper lid member 332 is in a retracted state (FIG. 11). (See (a)) is illustrated, and in FIGS. 12A and 12B, the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is illustrated in phantom lines. In FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B, whether or not the movable upper cover member 332 is overhanging is illustrated by the presence or absence of shading. That is, in FIG. 12 (a) and FIG. 12 (b), the portion where the hatching is formed is in contact with the front plate member 320 or the front plate so as to block the passage of the sphere with the front plate member 320. This is a portion close to the member 320.

  In the state shown in FIG. 12A, the sphere falling on the path C <b> 2 flows down along the upper side surface of the moving upper cover member 332 and is discharged to the out port 314. In this case, the moving upper lid member 332 may fall down due to the weight of the sphere, and as a result, when the left and right ends of the moving upper lid member 332 are moved below the stepped portion 324a, the sphere is discharged to the out port 314. It becomes impossible and it will interfere with the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the movable upper cover member 332 is several times as long as the length protruding to the front side of the deformed through hole 331a (about four times the length, see FIG. 11B). It is accommodated in the modified through-hole 331a and is formed so as to be able to contact the side surface of the modified through-hole 331a in the vertical direction across the front and rear direction of the variable winning device 330. Therefore, by reducing the clearance between the moving upper lid member 332 and the deformed through-hole 331a, it is possible to suppress the moving upper lid member 332 from falling down due to the weight of the ball colliding with the moving upper lid member 332. Thus, the left and right end portions of the movable upper cover member 332 can be formed at the surface position with the step portion 324a, and the nail to the specific winning opening 65a can be lowered downward, so that the bottom of the third symbol display device 81 The edge can be lowered downward.

  As shown in FIG. 12B, in the case where the movable upper lid member 332 forms a retracted state, the sphere can flow down toward the specific winning opening 65a. At this time, the sphere rolling along the inner rail 61 from the left and right along the path C1 collides with the stepped portion 324a and is discharged to the out port 314. Therefore, the sphere falls along the path C2 from above toward the specific winning port 65a. Rolls on the inner rail 61 and reaches the specific winning opening 65a.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the vertical width of the left and right end portions of the specific winning opening 65a is formed to be equal to or smaller than the diameter of the sphere. That is, the vertical distance from the inner rail 61 at the left and right ends of the movable upper lid member 332 is formed to be equal to or smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the height of the step portion 324a from the inner rail 61 can be reduced, and the arrangement of the out ports 314 through which the balls falling from the step portion 324a can be lowered.

  In this case, it is difficult for the ball to enter from the left and right end portions of the specific winning opening 65a (in addition, in this embodiment, the ball is blocked from the base plate 60). However, since the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed along the inner rail 61, the ball flowing down to the front side of the right and left end portions of the specific winning opening 65a is moved along the inner rail 61 toward the center of the game area by gravity. Then, the player enters the specific winning opening 65a. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed to be inclined rearward (see FIG. 11), it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 12).

  As a result, the movable upper cover member 332 that forms the upper side of the specific winning opening 65a is spaced apart from the inner rail 61 above the diameter of the sphere at least near the center of the game area (the vicinity where the inner rail 61 is disposed at the lowest position). Therefore, the arrangement position of the movable upper lid member 332 can be lowered. Therefore, compared with the case where it is necessary to separate upward from the inner rail 61 at a position other than the center of the inner rail 61 beyond the diameter of the sphere, the arrangement position of the variable winning device 330 can be lowered downward. Thereby, the space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be lowered downward.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the function of the ball flow ribs 311c and 321a and the ball feeding portion 325 and the fact that light is collected by the front inclined side surface 332a1f will be described. 13A is a cross-sectional view of the board surface lower unit 300 taken along line XIIIa-XIIIa in FIG. 12B, and FIG. 13B is a board lower unit 300 taken along line XIIIb-XIIIb in FIG. FIG. 13C is a cross-sectional view of the panel surface lower unit 300 in which the arrangement of the light irradiation units 331c1 is virtually changed from FIG. 13B.

  In FIG. 13A, the rolling path of the sphere is described as paths C1a, C1b, and C2a, and the movable upper cover member 332 in the retracted state is illustrated by an imaginary line. The movable upper lid member 332 is on the near side (upper side of FIG. 12B) than the cross section of FIG. 13A, and is not actually visible, but for the convenience of explanation, it is viewed in the vertical direction (see FIG. 13). In a state in which the positions of (viewed in the vertical direction) coincide with each other, it is shown by an imaginary line in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 13B and FIG. 13C, three spheres flowing down the lower passage 331b are virtually illustrated.

  The path of the sphere that rolls along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 6) from the left-right direction and is discharged to the out port 314 will be described. As shown in FIG. 13A, the sphere rolling from the left-right direction toward the center of FIG. 13A abuts on at least one of the ball flow rib 311c or the ball flow rib 321a. That is, the ball that rolls while abutting the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 abuts the ball flow rib 311c, and the ball that rolls while abutting the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is a ball flow rib. 321a abuts.

  Here, when the sphere comes into contact with the ball flow rib 311c, the velocity direction of the sphere is directed in the direction along the path C1a, and then comes into contact with the ball flow rib 321a. Therefore, regardless of whether the sphere rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 or the sphere rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320, the rolling sphere is lengthened. It can be brought into contact with the rib 321a.

  By causing a ball that rolls along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 6) to abut against the rib 321a, the velocity direction of the ball can be directed in the direction along the path C1b. In this case, the speed of the sphere can be directed to the back side (upper side in FIG. 13 (a)) before the sphere is arranged on the front side of the out port 314. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from when the ball is arranged on the front side of the out port 314 to when the ball is discharged from the game area, and to prevent the ball from staying on the front side of the out port 314. In addition, the opening width of the out port 314 can be suppressed. Thereby, when the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 5) and the out port 314 are arranged side by side, the arrangement of the specific winning port 65a can be lowered below the game area.

  The case where a sphere falls between the step parts 324a arranged in a pair of left and right will be described. In this case, the sphere that has fallen between the step portions 324a rolls toward the center in the left-right direction, and the sphere contacts the left and right side surfaces 325b of the ball feed portion 325, so that the speed direction of the sphere changes to the path C2a A game ball flowing down the upper surface of 61 hits the left and right side surfaces 325b of the ball feeding portion 325, the speed direction of the game ball is switched to the direction toward the lower passage 331b, and flows down toward the lower passage 331b. The path along which the game ball passes). Thereby, since it can suppress that a ball | bowl stays in the front side of the specific winning opening 65a (refer FIG. 5), an over winning can be suppressed.

  When the sphere flows down along the lower passage 331b and crosses the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the sphere blocks the light so that the light does not reach the front inclined side surface 332a1f. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball has won the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 12) based on whether the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320 are viewed brightly or darkly. it can.

  Accordingly, as in the present embodiment, the front plate member 320 formed of a light-transmitting resin material is disposed in front of the specific winning opening 65a, and the inside of the specific winning opening 65a is difficult to visually recognize. In addition, it can be confirmed that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a due to the change in brightness of the light projection range E0. Therefore, it is not necessary to remove the specific winning port 65a from diagonally above in order to confirm that a ball enters the specific winning port 65a, and the burden on the player can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the irradiation direction of the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect at an angle close to a right angle (see FIG. 13B). Therefore, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a as compared to the case where the sphere flows down in the light traveling direction (see FIG. 13C) or the case where the sphere flows down along the light irradiation direction. The period during which the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b blocks light can be shortened. In other words, the period during which the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 is viewed brightly can be lengthened, and the rendering ability of the front side inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 can be ensured.

  As shown in FIG. 13B, when the light path E1 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect (cross) at an angle close to a right angle, the light path E1 is blocked by the sphere. Thereafter, the light is not blocked by the sphere around the passage of the sphere through the front end portion (right side of FIG. 13B) of the lower passage 331b (the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f).

  In this case, even if the spheres are connected and flow down the lower passage 331b, the path E1 is shielded for each sphere, so that the brightness change of the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f or the front plate member 320 is changed. By confirming, the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a can be confirmed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13C, when the light path E3 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b are in a parallel relationship, after the light path E3 is blocked by the sphere, When the sphere reaches the rear end of the lower passage 331b (left side of FIG. 13C, in the vicinity of the sensor S) and falls downward, the light is not blocked by the sphere (so that the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f). Become). That is, until that time, the light path E3 remains blocked by the sphere.

  In this case, when the spheres are connected and flow down the lower passage 331b, the light path E3 is blocked by the first sphere (the left sphere in FIG. 13C) as long as the sphere is arranged in the lower passage 331b. Further, after the first sphere falls downward from the rear end portion (left side of FIG. 13C) of the lower passage 331b, the light path to the second sphere (right sphere of FIG. 13C). E3 is blocked. In addition, when the second sphere falls from the rear end of the lower passage 331b and the next sphere (third sphere) enters the lower passage 331b, the light path to the sphere. E3 is blocked. In this way, the sphere continues to shield the light path E3, and the sphere is always visually recognized as dark while flowing down the lower passage 331b. That is, the number of changes in whether the light is viewed brightly or darkly does not necessarily match the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a, and the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a is not the same. Confirmation becomes difficult. In contrast, the present embodiment has the above-described advantages.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be recessed toward the back side toward the central portion in the left-right direction, so that the light emitted from the pair of left and right light irradiation portions 331c1 is the front inclined side surface 332a1f. By being reflected, the light is condensed to the center of the front plate member 320 along the path E1, and reaches the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 12B).

  Here, in this embodiment, since the front plate member 320 is disposed on the front side of the movable upper lid member 332, the specific winning opening 65a can be hidden, while the front inclined side surface 332a1f is visible through the front plate member 320. Therefore, it may be difficult to grasp the change in brightness of the front inclined side surface 332a1f. In that case, it is necessary to increase the light intensity of a light emitting element such as an LED used for the light irradiation unit 331c1, and there is a problem that the light emitting elements that can be used for the light irradiation unit 331c1 are limited.

  On the other hand, the front inclined side surface 332a1f condenses the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1 to the center of the front plate member 320, so that each of the light irradiated from the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is overlapped, The intensity of light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be improved. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in selecting a light emitting element that can be used for the light irradiation unit 331c1 (it is possible to select a light emitting element with low light intensity).

  Moreover, since the light irradiated from a pair of light irradiation part 331c1 is overlapped and visually recognized by front view (refer FIG.12 (b)), a pair of light irradiation is made by making light colors mutually differ. A total of three colors of light emitted from the part 331c1 and the combined color thereof can be visually recognized in the projection range E0 (see FIG. 12B).

  Here, since the light irradiated from each of the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is shielded by a sphere that rolls along the path C2a independently (see FIG. 13), at the timing when the sphere shields the light, The color of the light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be switched variously.

  For example, in FIG. 13, a case is considered in which “blue” light is emitted from the right light irradiation unit 331 c 1 and “red” light is emitted from the left light irradiation unit 331 c 1. In this case, when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, light is emitted in the order of “blue”, “purple (overlapping portion)”, and “red” from the right side in the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 12B). Is visible.

  In this case, if the sphere rolls along the path C2a on the right side of FIG. 13 and blocks the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the “blue” light is blocked, and thus the light projection range E0 Only “red” light is visible.

  On the other hand, when the sphere rolls along the path C2a on the left side of FIG. 13 and shields the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the “red” color light is shielded. Only “blue” light is visible.

  Thus, the mode of the light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be changed depending on which path the sphere rolls and which light irradiation unit 331c1 shields. The change in the light mode is caused by a sphere that flows down the game area along a random path while colliding with a nail or the like, so that the change in the light mode can be generated at a random timing. That is, as compared with the case where the change in the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 is caused by electronic control, it is possible to perform a more rich effect and improve the effect.

  In the present embodiment, the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed in a square shape as viewed from above, but may be formed in a parabolic shape in top view from the viewpoint of collecting light.

  The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 in the first embodiment, and FIG. 14B shows the first hit type counter C4 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C5 and the winning in the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, and a second per-random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored.

  The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C5 updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is stored. When the value of the first per-random number counter C5 acquired based on the start winning matches with any one of the determination values defined in the first per-random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14B) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C4 is set to each big hit type. , And a special symbol lottery opportunity in association with the type of winning prize opening. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C4 is selected.

  Specifically, if the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first winning port 64) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 19”. Is defined in association with jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 14B).

  When the jackpot is A, 10 rounds of jackpot game are executed. In this case, the player can receive about 1500 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is “20 to 49”, the big hit B is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 14B).

  When the jackpot B is reached, a six-round jackpot game is executed. In this case, the player can receive about 900 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is “50 to 99”, the big hit C is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 14B).

  When the jackpot C is reached, a four-round jackpot game is executed. In this case, the player can receive about 600 prize balls.

  As described above, when the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first winning port 64) is a big win, the difference in the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds. As the number increases, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases and the time required for the jackpot game also increases.

  The jackpot based on the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first winning slot 64) can win 10 rounds with a 20% probability, but it has a 50% chance to win 4 rounds. Basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time compared to the 15-round jackpot game, so that it is possible to start launching a ball for the subsequent jackpot acquisition early.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second winning port 640) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 is within the range of “0 to 79”. a is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 14B).

  When the jackpot is a, 15 rounds of jackpot game are executed. In this case, the player can receive about 2250 prize balls (maximum payout).

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is “80 to 89”, the big hit b is associated and defined (see 202b5 in FIG. 14B).

  When the jackpot b is reached, as in the case of jackpot A, 10 rounds of jackpot game are executed. In this case, the player can receive about 1500 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is “90 to 99”, the big hit c is associated and defined (see 202b6 in FIG. 14B).

  When the jackpot c is reached, an eight-round jackpot game is executed. In this case, the player can receive about 1200 prize balls.

  As described above, the jackpot generated in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entering the second winning port 640) is the jackpot a (the biggest payout jackpot) with a probability of 80%. Therefore, compared with the number of payouts expected in the case of winning a special symbol 1 lottery, the number of payouts expected in the case of winning a special symbol 2 lottery can be increased.

  As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when hitting the normal symbol is reached. It is set to be long (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second winning opening 640, the special symbol 2 is easily drawn. Therefore, once the transition to the probable change state of the special symbol can be made, the special symbol prone change state is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol, and when the big win is likely to become a big hit a (the biggest hit of big ball). Since it becomes easy, it becomes easy for a player to acquire a lot of prize balls. Thus, the game can be performed while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 14C) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 14C). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 14C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, referring to the value of the second per-random number counter C5 acquired based on the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 and the second per-random number table 202c, It is determined whether or not there is. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the variation pattern display mode is defined for each display mode.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 28. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the internal shape of the flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the front side of the movable upper lid member 332 flows is unchanged, but the board surface lower unit 2300 in the second embodiment has the movable upper lid. A movable effect member 2360 that operates in the flow path through which the game ball that has passed the front side of the member 332 flows is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  15 and 16 are front exploded perspective views of the gaming board 13 and the board lower unit 2300 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 17 is an exploded rear perspective view of the gaming board 13 and the board lower unit 2300.

  15 shows a state in which only the front plate member 2320 is disassembled from the game board 13, and in FIGS. 16 and 17, the front unit 310 and the variable prize winning device 2330 of the board surface lower unit 2300 are further played from FIG. The state disassembled from the board 13 is illustrated. For ease of understanding, the game board 13 is illustrated as an opening by omitting the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) and the block members that form the flow surface at the lower left and right sides. It is illustrated in a simplified manner with only 60 left.

  As shown in FIG. 15, a specific winning opening 65 a is formed along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed in a downwardly convex curved shape, the arrangement position of the specific winning opening 65a is set as compared with the case where the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed by a straight line along the left-right direction. Can be lowered downward. As for the outer edge of the specific winning opening 65a, the upper side is formed by the movable upper lid member 332 (see FIG. 16), the lower side is formed by the lower edge of the inner rail 61, and the left and right sides are the left and right walls of the opening upper portion 313. It is formed with a part.

  As will be described later, the specific winning opening 65a is switched between the above-mentioned closed state and open state by the sliding movement of the movable upper cover member 332 back and forth, and the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is, for example, 15 It can be repeated (15 rounds).

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the board lower unit 2300 is a unit that constitutes an out port 314 through which a ball is discharged and a specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 15). A front unit 310 that is fitted from the front side into a receiving opening 60a drilled in the front-rear direction and fastened and fixed, and a front plate that is fastened and fixed to the front unit 310 from the front side and has a spherical path formed on the back side. It mainly includes a member 2320 and a variable winning device 2330 including a moving upper lid member 332 that is fitted into the receiving opening 60a from the back side and fastened and fixed and changes the flow direction of the ball.

  The front unit 310 maintains the configuration described above in the first embodiment, although the design changes are made in response to the design changes of the front plate member 2320 and the variable winning device 2330. Since the characteristic part of each structure is the same, the same code | symbol as 1st Embodiment is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In this embodiment, the vertical width of the left and right walls of the opening upper portion 313 (corresponding to the left and right walls of the specific winning opening 65a) is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. Is done.

  The out ports 314 are formed as a pair on the left and right sides of the upper opening portion 313, and the lower side of the out ports 314 is disposed below the upper left and right corners of the upper opening portion 313, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, unlike the first embodiment, the upper side of the out port 314 is disposed below.

  The front plate member 2320 is a plate-like member formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the main body plate portion 321, the first winning opening front portion 322, and the electric accessory support portion described above in the first embodiment. 323 and a ball feeding unit 325, and as an difference from the first embodiment, an out-out lower plate 2324 disposed along the lower surface of the out-out 314 is provided.

  The out mouth lower plate 2324 is provided with a thin rib extending in the front-rear direction on the upper side surface in the left-right direction. Further, the out-out lower plate 2324 includes a stepped portion 2324a that protrudes upward at the left and right inner ends. The sphere that has flowed down can be decelerated by the unevenness formed on the upper side surface of the out-mouth lower plate 2324. Further, the rib formed on the out-out lower plate 2324 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back side. Thereby, the ball that has flowed down can be quickly discharged to the out port 314.

  Since the inclined plate portion 312 described above is formed directly above the out-out lower plate 2324 (see FIG. 27), the ball that falls after rolling the inclined plate portion 312 faces the out-out lower plate 2324. Falling is suppressed. That is, a ball that falls after rolling on the inclined plate portion 312 falls on the inner side in the left-right direction of the pair of out-out lower plates 2324 (position where the moving upper lid member 332 is disposed), or on the out-out lower plate 2324. Either it falls to the outer end (near the ball flow rib 321a and the boundary position between the rib formation range and the rail through which the ball flows). These are both outside the rib forming range. Thereby, it can suppress that a ball | bowl falls from the high place to the out mouth lower board 2324, and can improve durability of the out mouth lower board 2324.

  The step portion 2324a has a longer vertical width (more than the diameter of the game ball) compared to the step portion 324a of the first embodiment, and is formed between the out port 314 and the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 15). The sphere that flows down from the left and right direction and flows down the upper side surface of the lower bottom plate 2324 is prevented from flowing down to the center in the left and right direction beyond the step 2324a (see FIG. 27). ). In other words, the sphere that flows down from the left-right direction and flows down the upper side surface of the out-out lower plate 2324 is guided exclusively to the out-out port 314.

  Next, the variable winning device 2330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 2330, FIG. 19 is an exploded rear view of the variable winning device 2330, and FIG. 20A is a top view of the variable winning device 2330. 20 (b) is a front view of the variable winning device 2330, and FIG. 20 (c) is a side view of the variable winning device 2330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXc in FIG. 20 (b). 18 to 20 illustrate the tilted state of the movable effect member 2360.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the variable prize winning device 2330 includes a main body member 2331 that forms a skeleton, and a movable upper lid member 332 that is inserted through the main body member 2331 from the front and is slidable in the front-rear direction. A rear cover member 334 that houses at least a solenoid 2333 that generates a driving force for slidingly moving the upper cover member 332 and a lever member 334 b that is swung by the solenoid 2333 and that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 2331. A first transmission member 2340 that moves up and down as the claw portion 2333c integrally formed with the hook-shaped member 333b of the solenoid 2333 moves up and down, a second transmission member 2350 that works in conjunction with the first transmission member 2340, A load that is pivotally supported by the front end portion of the main body member 2331 and applied from the second transmission member 2350 Mainly it includes a movable directing member 2360 that changes more attitude, the.

  The main body member 2331 constitutes a main body front part 2331F that constitutes the front part of the flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the sensor S flows down, and the left and right side parts and the back part of the flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the sensor S flow down. And a main body rear portion 2331B. In addition, in this embodiment, illustration of the light irradiation apparatus 331c (refer FIG. 8) mentioned in 1st Embodiment is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main body front portion 2331F includes a front opening 331a1 of a deformed through hole 331a through which the movable upper lid member 332 is inserted, and a lower passage 331b through which a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 15) flows down.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the main body front portion 2331F includes an extended floor portion 2331e that extends in a plate shape from the upper end of the lower passage 331b to the left and right sides, and an extended end of the extended floor portion 2331e. An extended wall portion 2331f extending upward, and a pair of left and right support wall portions 2331g whose front ends are disposed on the front side of the front end of the extended wall portion 2331f on the left and right outer sides of the extended wall portion 2331f, A concave support portion 2331h that is recessed from the front side to the back side and configured to pivotally support the movable effect member 2360 is mainly provided on the inner side surface of the pair of support wall portions 2331g.

  The extended floor portion 2331e has a front end portion disposed below the movable effect member 2360 (see FIG. 20B) and is configured to be inclined downward toward the lower passage 331b in the left-right direction. Therefore, when a game ball rides on the extended floor portion 2331e by rolling on the upper surface of the tilted movable effect member 2360, the game ball rolls toward the lower passage 331b along the inclination of the extended floor portion 2331e. Can be made.

  The extended wall portion 2331f is disposed with a slight gap between the extended wall portion 2331f and the support wall portion 2331g. This gap is sized so that a sliding portion 2363 of a movable effect member 2360, which will be described later, can enter, and is used to suppress the posture deviation of the movable effect member 2360 while the sliding portion 2363 enters the gap. is there. That is, the posture deviation of the movable effect member 2360 can be suppressed by the extending wall portion 2331f.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the main body front portion 2331F extends in the form of a plate up and down at a position slightly longer than the left and right width of the first transmission member 2340 from the inner surface Ins of the wall portion constituting the left side surface. A first transmission support portion 2331i that is provided, and a pair of second transmission support portions 2331j that are recessed toward the front side in a manner to pivotally support the second transmission member 2350 at the rear side end portion. Is provided.

  The first transmission support portion 2331i functions as a portion that guides the movement of the first transmission member 2340 disposed between the inner surface Ins of the wall portion (regulates the movement direction). In other words, the first transmission support portion 2331i is disposed at a distance slightly longer than the left and right width direction of the first transmission member 2340 with the inner surface Ins. Thus, the first transmission member 2340 is restricted from moving in the left-right direction and is allowed to move in the up-down direction.

  The second transmission support portion 2331j is a portion that pivotally supports a pivoted protrusion 2352 formed at the rear end portion (one end portion) of the second transmission member 2350. Therefore, the front end portion (other end portion) of the second transmission member 2350 is disposed in front of the second transmission support portion 2331j.

  The main body rear part 2331B is a recess formed by recessing the rear opening 331a2 of the deformed through hole 331a through which the movable upper lid member 332 is inserted and the front side toward the rear side, and accommodates a solenoid 2333, a lever member 334b, and the like. And a back side housing portion 2331d.

  The back side housing portion 2331d is formed in a shape that allows the claw portion 2333c of the solenoid 2333 to be disposed inside (a shape that bulges to the left).

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the main body rear portion 2331B is drilled in the front-rear direction with a lateral width slightly wider than the lateral width of the claw portion 2333c of the solenoid 2333, and can guide the vertical movement of the claw portion 2333c. A long hole portion 2331s extending in the vertical direction, and a recessed portion 2331t recessed from the front side surface to the back side above the long hole portion 2331s.

  The recessed portion 2331t is arranged to face the second transmission support portion 2331j in the assembled state in the front-rear direction, and is slightly larger than the radius of the proximal cylindrical portion 2351 formed at the rear end portion (one end portion) of the second transmission member 2350. It is recessed with a radius of curvature (an arc shape centered on the central axis of the pivot support protrusion 2352).

  Accordingly, when the second transmission member 2350 is pivotally supported in the shaft hole portion formed by covering the second transmission support portion 2331j on the front side surface of the main body rear portion 2331B, the rear end portion of the second transmission member 2350 The base end cylindrical portion 2351 and the recessed portion 2331t (one end portion) can be maintained in a state of being spaced apart at an equal distance at a predetermined angle.

  In this case, for example, when the second transmission member 2350 rotates, the rotation axis is shifted, and the rear end portion (one end portion) of the second transmission member 2350 is rubbed against the recessed portion 2331t. Since it can be rubbed in contact with the surface, wear of the second transmission member 2350 can be delayed, or damage to the second transmission member 2350 can be suppressed.

  The solenoid 2333 is disposed below the main body portion 333a and the main body portion 333a that generates an upward driving force by flowing an electric current, and is usually disposed at the lower end position by a biasing spring below the lever member 334b. A bowl-shaped bowl-shaped member 333b that rises to the upper end position by the driving force of the body part 333a, and the bowl-shaped member 333b are extended leftward from a base end (upper part) connected to the body part 2333a. And a bent bar-like claw portion 2333c extending forward.

  The claw portion 2333c has a shape that tapers toward the front, and is inserted into the long hole portion 2331s from the back side in the assembled state (for example, see FIG. 20). And the front-end | tip part which protrudes in the front side of the long hole part 2331s is inserted in the to-be-inserted part 2343 of the 1st transmission member 2340 from the back side. Since the claw portion 2333c has a tapered shape, it can be easily inserted.

  The first transmission member 2340 is a member housed between the inner surface Ins and the first transmission support portion 2331i in the assembled state (for example, see FIG. 20), and a plate-like portion 2341 that forms the left side surface, A projecting portion 2342 projecting rightward in the form of a block from the middle portion of the plate-shaped portion 2341, a inserted portion 2343 recessed toward the front side on the rear side surface of the projecting portion 2342, and a projecting portion 2342, a lower extending plate portion 2344 extending downward so as to have a plate shape having a front side surface and a surface position surface and a left side surface and a surface position surface, and a left side from the upper right side surface of the plate portion 2341 And a protrusion 2345 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape.

  The length from the right side surface of the plate-like portion 2341 to the left end of the overhanging portion 2342 and the lower extending plate portion 2344 is slightly shorter than the distance from the inner surface Ins to the right side surface of the first transmission support portion 2331i.

  The plate-like portion 2341 has a long plate-like main body portion 2341a that is long in the vertical direction, an upper front overhang portion 2341b that projects to the front side with the same thickness at the upper portion of the main body portion 2341a, and the same thickness at the lower portion of the main body portion 2341a. And a lower rear projecting portion 2341c projecting to the rear side.

  The inserted portion 2343 is a recess into which the claw portion 2333c of the solenoid 2333 is inserted, and the recessed width (up and down, left and right) and the recessed depth are formed so that the claw portion 2333c of the solenoid 2333 can be inserted. . That is, the claw portion 2333c is formed in a shape that can be fitted into the inserted portion 2343. As described above, the claw portion 2333c has a tapered shape (tapered shape), so that the claw portion 2333c can be easily inserted into the insertion portion 2343.

  The first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350 are connected by the protrusion 2345 being inserted into the second transmission member 2350. Here, the connection does not only indicate that they are structurally connected, but also indicates an operation connection (follow-up operation, synchronization operation, etc.). That is, the second transmission member 2350 rotates as the first transmission member 2340 moves up and down.

  The second transmission member 2350 is a member that is rotatably supported by the second transmission support portion 2331j of the main body front portion 2331F, and has a cylindrical base end cylindrical portion 2351 having a horizontal axis at the rear end portion, and A pair of pivot support protrusions 2352 protruding in the left-right direction in a columnar shape with a small coaxial diameter with respect to the base end cylindrical portion 2351, and extending in a rod shape toward the front along the left end of the base end cylindrical portion 2351. The extending rod-like portion 2353 and the insertion hole 2354 which is formed in the middle of the extending rod-like portion 2353 along the longitudinal direction of the extending rod-like portion 2353 in the left-right direction with a long slot shape. Prepare for.

  The axial direction (left-right direction) length of the base end cylindrical portion 2351 is slightly shorter than the interval (left-right interval) between the second transmission support portions 2331j.

  The projection length of the pivot support protrusion 2352 is equal to the thickness of the second transmission support portion 2331j, and the diameter of the pivot support projection 2352 is greater than the recessed width (vertical width) of the second transmission support portion 2331j. Is also slightly shortened.

  Therefore, in the state where the pivot support protrusion 2352 is supported by the second transmission support portion 2331j, the axial displacement (left-right direction) of the proximal end cylindrical portion 2351 is shifted to the plate on which the second transmission support portion 2331j is formed. It can be regulated by the part.

  The left-right width of the extending rod-like portion 2353 is slightly shorter than the length obtained by subtracting the thickness of the plate-like portion 2341 from the distance between the inner surface Ins and the first transmission support portion 2331i. Therefore, since the extended rod-like portion 2353 is disposed at a position where it does not interfere with the plate-like portion 2341 of the first transmission member 2340, the extension rod-like portion 2353 can be interlocked without interfering with each other.

  The insertion hole 2354 is a long hole through which the protruding portion 2345 is inserted, and the width in the short direction is designed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protruding portion 2345.

  The movable effect member 2360 is supported by the main body front portion 2331F so as to be able to tilt (rotate), and rotates between a tilted state and an upright state (respectively disposed at the end position of the rotation). A thin plate-like main body plate portion 2361, a pair of support shaft portions 2362 projecting in a columnar shape in the left-right direction from the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 2361, and upward along the right end of the main body plate portion 2361. A sliding portion 2363 formed in a substantially fan shape at the center of the support shaft portion 2362 and a pair of right and left in a substantially fan shape at the center of the support shaft portion 2362 is formed on the opposite side of the support shaft portion 2362 of the sliding portion 2363. And a recessed portion 2365 that is recessed toward the upper end side at the lower end of the central position of the main body plate portion 2361.

  The support shaft portion 2362 is configured as a portion that is rotatably fitted in the recessed support portion 2331 h, and the main body plate portion 2361 is formed between the support shaft portions 2362. Therefore, similarly to the movable upper lid member 332, the game ball and the main body plate portion 2361 are configured to be able to interfere (collision) regardless of the left and right positions where the game ball passes through the specific winning opening 65a.

  Note that after the support shaft portion 2362 is fitted into the recessed support portion 2331h, the recessed support portion 2331h is covered with a plate-like member cp from the front side.

  The sliding portion 2363 has a substantially arc-shaped front side portion having a radius in the front-back width of the main body plate portion 2361 at the center of the support shaft portion 2362, and is slightly larger than the gap between the extended wall portion 2331f and the support wall portion 2331g. It is a substantially fan-like plate-like portion with a short thickness.

  The transmission part 2364 arranged on the right side in front view is a part to which the driving force is transmitted from the second transmission member 2350.

  The transmission portion 2364 arranged on the left side in front view contacts the back surface (lower surface) of the extended floor portion 2331e when the movable effect member 2360 is tilted, and functions as a stopper that defines the lower limit of the moving range of the movable effect member 2360. Part.

  The shape of the upper side surface of the transmission portion 2364 corresponds to the operating angle of the movable effect member 2360, and details will be described later.

  The recessed portion 2365 is formed with a recessed depth that allows a game ball to pass between the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 15) (see FIG. 25A). Specifically, the width is the same as the left and right width of the lower passage 331 b, and is formed with a depth that is approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball along the short direction of the main body plate portion 2361. By forming the recessed portion 2365, the shaft support position of the movable effect member 2360 can be further disposed below.

  In the present embodiment, the variable winning device 2330 is disposed at a position where the distance between the rotation shaft of the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61 is less than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, when a game ball enters the front side of the movable effect member 2360, the game ball may be clogged between the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61, which may hinder the game. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the movable effect member 2360 includes the recessed portion 2365, even if the game ball enters the front side of the movable effect member 2360, the game ball is inserted into the recessed portion. 2365 and the inner rail 61 can flow.

  Thereby, the arrangement of the variable winning device 2330 can be lowered while preventing the game ball from being clogged between the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61.

  In addition, since the force that maintains the movable effect member 2360 in the tilted state is only its own weight, the possibility that the game ball that has entered between the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61 is prevented from flowing down by the load is reduced. Can do.

  The recessed width of the recessed portion 2365 is formed in a range where the game ball cannot fall from the game area, that is, inside the left and right widths of the electric accessory supporting portion 323 (see FIG. 16). That is, when the movable effect member 2360 is in a tilted state, the game ball that has dropped from the moving upper lid member 332 falls exclusively on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360.

  With reference to FIG. 21, the flow-down mode of the game ball falling on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 will be described. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 2330 along the line XXI-XXI in FIG. In FIG. 21, the retracted state of the movable upper cover member 332 and the tilted state of the movable effect member 2360 are illustrated.

  In FIG. 21, the game ball that has fallen from the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 flows down as the moving upper lid member 332 moves from the state in which the game ball rides on the upper surface of the movable upper lid member 332 in the extended state to the retracted state. An example of the aspect and the outer shape of the movable upper lid member 332 in the overhanging state are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 21, after the game ball jumps on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360, a place where at least a part of the game ball can reach above the lower bottom surface of the deformed through hole 331a can be formed. The arrangement and material (mainly coefficient of restitution) of the movable effect member 2360 are set.

  Thereby, since the movement of the game ball dropped from the moving upper lid member 332 can be made intense, the attention to the game ball can be improved.

  In addition, compared to the case where the game ball flows down without being bounced, it is possible to lengthen the time required for the game ball to drop from the moving upper cover member 332 and pass through the sensor S, so a so-called over-winning is achieved. It can be easily generated.

  In the present embodiment, after the movable upper lid member 332 is driven to the open state (retracted state), the game ball on the upper surface of the movable upper lid member 332 jumps on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 and then reaches the highest position. The arrangement of the movable effect member 2360 is designed so that 0.2 seconds or more (about 0.4 seconds) elapses before reaching. Thereby, a period during which the player can visually recognize the game ball in the direction of the arrow I1 looking into the lower side of the movable upper lid member 332 from above the movable upper lid member 332 (the game ball is arranged directly below the movable upper lid member 332, (The period until it can no longer be seen) can be lengthened, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player misses the game ball that has passed through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 as viewed in the direction of the arrow I1.

  Accordingly, it is possible to easily grasp the number of game balls passing through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 and flowing down to the sensor S in the game as viewed in the direction of the arrow I1, and therefore the timing at which the moving upper lid member 332 is closed. Can be easily predicted. In this case, for example, in a game mode in which the game ball is stopped in a timely manner in order to prevent the game ball from reaching the movement upper lid member 332 when the movable upper cover member 332 is in the closed state (the extended state), It is easy to measure the timing of stopping.

  In the present embodiment, the main body plate portion 2361 of the movable effect member 2360 is disposed at a position where the game ball falling from the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 lands, and the moving upper lid member 332 moves toward the closed state (the extended state). With this, the movable effect member 2360 rotates toward the standing state, so that the landing point of the game ball moves upward. Thereby, the distance between the moving upper cover member 332 and the landing point of the game ball is shortened.

  In other words, the displacement of the movable upper cover member 332 is a slide displacement in the substantially horizontal direction, whereas the displacement of the movable effect member 2360 is a rotational displacement about the rotation axis facing the substantially horizontal direction. Depending on the state (posture) of the effect member 2360, the distance to the moving upper lid member 332 changes. In the present embodiment, the change is directed to the direction in which the distance is shortened as the moving upper lid member 332 moves toward the closed state (the extended state).

  Thereby, the variation of the subsequent flowing-down aspect of the game ball which fell from the movement upper cover member 332 can be increased. That is, the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 while the movable effect member 2360 is displaced toward the standing state in addition to the flow path of the game ball landing on the movable effect member 2360 while the movable effect member 2360 is maintained in the tilted state. The game ball can be caused to flow down along the trajectory of the game ball that has landed on the surface of the game ball or the game ball staying on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360. In the latter case, the game ball is given a rear upward load from the movable effect member 2360, so that the game ball moves more intensely.

  Next, the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 2330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 (a), FIG. 23 (a), FIG. 24 (a) and FIG. 25 (a) are cross-sectional views of the variable winning device 2330 along the line XXa-XXa in FIG. 20 (b). 23 (b), FIG. 24 (b) and FIG. 25 (b) are cross-sectional views of the variable winning device 2330 along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20 (b).

  22 to 25, the state in which the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are lowered is illustrated in time series, and in FIGS. 22A and 22B, the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are FIG. 23A and FIG. 23B show the state in which the movable upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state disposed at the uppermost position. In FIG. 23A and FIG. 23B, the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 is released from the state shown in FIG. , The hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are slightly lowered, and the state where the movable upper cover member 332 is in the closed reference state is illustrated. In FIGS. 24A and 24B, the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion FIG. 25 (a) and FIG. 25 (b) show the state where 2333c is further lowered and the movable upper cover member 332 is extended, and in FIG. 25 (a) and FIG. How 2360 is the standing state is illustrated.

  First, the shift in the operation timing of the movable upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 will be described. The states shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B are states in which the solenoid 2333 is excited.

  When the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 is released from the state shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are in the state shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B. Until the solenoid 2333 is lowered by the biasing force of the return spring. At this time, as the lever member 334b rotates, the movable upper cover member 332 slides to the front side, while the movable effect member 2360 maintains a tilted state (movable from the extended rod-like portion 2353 of the second transmission member 2350). No load is applied to the transmission part 2364 of the effect member 2360).

  That is, after the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 is released, the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 do not start to operate simultaneously, but the movable upper cover member 332 projects before the movable effect member 2360. Start moving towards the state.

  In the present embodiment, in the closed reference state of the movable upper lid member 332 shown in FIG. 23, the distance between the movable upper lid member 332 and the front plate member 2320 is configured to be less than the diameter of the game ball. That is, the movable upper lid member 332 can be restricted from passing the game ball to the sensor S by being displaced in the closing direction until the movable upper lid member 332 is closed to the state shown in FIG.

  Here, from the state of FIG. 22 to the state of FIG. 23, the second transmission member 2350 does not contact the movable effect member 2360, and the second transmission member 2350 is given a reaction force from the movable effect member 2360. No. Therefore, the weights of the second transmission member 2350 and the first transmission member 2340 can be directly applied to the bowl-shaped member 333b via the claw portion 2333c.

  As a result, the load related to the lowering of the hook-shaped member 333b can be increased, and the tilting operation of the lever member 334b can be started immediately after the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 is released. Can immediately start moving to the closed reference state and the overhanging state.

  In addition, as compared with the case where the movable effect member 2360 is given a load from the second transmission member 2350 from the start of the operation, the drive required at the start of the operation in which an excessive driving force is easily required because it is necessary to overcome inertia. The power can be reduced.

  Note that the state shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B is a state in which the game ball can drop onto the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360, and thus the impact when the game ball collides with the movable effect member 2360. The movable effect member 2360 may jump up. In this case, in this embodiment, since the extended rod-like portion 2353 of the second transmission member 2350 is disposed so as to protrude within the operation locus of the movable effect member 2360, the movable effect member 2360 is extended during the jumping operation. It collides with the rod-like part 2353.

  As a result, the movable effect member 2360 receives the reaction force from the extending rod-like portion 2353 and returns to the tilted state at an early stage. Therefore, the movable effect member 2360 can be easily maintained in a tilted state. On the other hand, the direction in which a load is applied from the movable effect member 2360 to the extended rod-like portion 2353 due to the jumping up of the movable effect member 2360 is the direction in which the extended rod-like portion 2353 is rotated backward. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the extended rod-like portion 2353 from falling forward due to a collision with the movable effect member 2360.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B, the extended rod-like portion 2353 and the transmission portion 2364 of the movable effect member 2360 come into contact with each other while the saddle-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c of the solenoid 2333 are lowered. It is a state to start.

  From the state shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b) to the state shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b), a saddle member 333b and a claw portion 2333c are attached to a return spring provided in the solenoid 2333. As the power descends, the extending tip of the extending rod-like portion 2353 descends while pushing down the upper surface of the transmission portion 2364 of the movable effect member 2360. Corresponding to the degree of the descent, the movable effect member 2360 is inclined from the tilted state (see FIGS. 23A and 23B) to the standing state (see FIGS. 25A and 25B). Rotate.

  As described above, in the closed reference state of the movable upper lid member 332 shown in FIG. 23A, the flow of the game ball toward the sensor S is already restricted by the movable upper lid member 332. That is, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball that has passed the front side of the movable upper lid member 332 from being hindered by the operation of the movable effect member 2360. For example, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has once passed the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 from bouncing back by the operation of the movable effect member 2360 from returning to the upper side of the moving upper lid member 332.

  When the action of returning the game ball to the upper side of the movable upper lid member 332 is desired, the movable effect member 2360 may be displaced toward the standing state before the movable upper lid member 332 enters the closed reference state. In this case, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of game balls entering the specific winning opening 65a.

  Further, in conjunction with the rotation of the movable effect member 2360, the moving upper lid member 332 slides to the front side and reaches the overhanging state as shown in FIG.

  A saddle member 333b and a claw portion 2333c are attached to the solenoid 2333 from the state shown in FIGS. As the power descends, the extending tip of the extending rod-like portion 2353 descends while pushing down the upper surface of the transmission portion 2364 of the movable effect member 2360. Corresponding to the degree of the descent, the movable effect member 2360 rotates toward the standing state (see FIGS. 25A and 25B).

  In FIGS. 24A and 24B, the rear end surface of the hook-shaped member 333b is in a range in which the lower claw portion 334b3 can come into contact with the lower claw portion 334b3 of the lever member 334b. The upper member 333b is brought into contact with the lower claw portion 334b3 at the upper end position until the state shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b) is changed to the state shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b). The rear end surface continues to contact the front end surface of the lower claw portion 334b3 (a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction in the state shown in FIGS. 24A and 25A).

  That is, even when the hook-shaped member 333b is lowered, the lever member 334b maintains the posture as it is, and the movable upper cover member 332 maintains the extended state. On the other hand, the first transmission member 2340 is lowered with the lowering of the claw portion 2333c integrated with the bowl-shaped member 333b, and the degree of rotation (tilting) of the second transmission member 2350 with the lowering of the first transmission member 2340 In response to this, the movable effect member 2360 rotates toward the standing state and stops in the standing state (see FIGS. 25A and 25B).

  The center of gravity of the movable effect member 2360 is disposed on the upper front side of the support shaft portion 2362 in the standing state. Therefore, even if the movable effect member 2360 is in the standing state, when the applied load is only its own weight, the movable effect member 2360 returns to the tilted state.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) so that the movable upper cover member 332 changes to the retracted state, and the movable effect member 2360 changes to the tilted state. When the excitation (drive) of 2333 is released, only the movable upper lid member 332 starts to operate, and then the movable upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 are interlocked (the movable effect member 2360 operates while the movable upper cover member 332 continues to operate). Then, only the movable effect member 2360 rotates after the moving upper lid member 332 stops, and the movable effect member 2360 stops in an upright state as the claw portion 2333c of the solenoid 2333 reaches the end of movement.

  In short, the movement upper lid member 332 is earlier than the movable effect member 2360, and the movement upper end member 332 is earlier than the movable effect member 2360.

  Next, a shift in operation timing when the movable upper cover member 332 moves from the extended state to the retracted state and the movable effect member 2360 moves from the standing state to the tilted state will be described. Note that the time elapse of the above-described operation is the same as tracing backward from FIG. 22 to FIG. 25, and will be described again with reference to FIGS.

  When the solenoid 2333 is in a non-excited (non-driven) state, as shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the saddle member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are lowered at the lower end by the urging force of the return spring provided in the solenoid 2333. Maintained in position.

  When the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) from the state shown in FIGS. 25A and 25B, the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are raised. For a while after the start of the rise, as shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the movable upper cover member 332 is maintained in the overhanging state, while the movable effect member 2360 is changed from the standing state to the inclined state. Start turning (tilting). That is, the operation start timing of the movable effect member 2360 is earlier than the operation start timing of the movable upper lid member 332.

  When the extending rod-like portion 2353 of the second transmission member 2350 that has applied a downward load (counterclockwise in the left view) to the transmission portion 2364 is retracted upward, the movable effect member 2360 receives a load applied to the transmission portion 2364. Since it is eliminated, it is rotated (tilted) by its own weight to the position where the load is again applied (see FIG. 24B). That is, how the movable effect member 2360 operates while the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are raised depends on the shape of the extending rod-shaped portion 2353.

  When the state shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B is passed, the load applied to the lever member 334b in such a manner that the upper surface of the hook-shaped member 333b pushes up the lower end surface Uns of the main body portion 334b1 of the lever member 334b, The lever member 334b starts to rotate backward (counterclockwise when viewed from the left), and the moving upper cover member 332 slides toward the retracted state accordingly. The movable effect member 2360 is rotated (tilted) to the state shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B in conjunction with the sliding operation of the movable upper lid member 332, and FIGS. The state shown in b) (tilted state) is stopped at the lower end.

  When the state shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B is passed, the state of the movable effect member 2360 is maintained in the tilted state, while the moving upper cover member 332 continues the rearward sliding movement and is in the retracted state. The arrangement shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B is stopped as the end point position.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) and the hook member 333b is disposed at the upper end position, the contact between the hook member 333b and the lower end surface Uns of the lever member 334b is released. (The posture of the lever member 334b is stabilized in a state where the hook member 333b and the lower end surface Uns of the lever member 334b are separated from each other).

  In other words, in a state where the lever member 334b is disposed at the terminal position on the reverse side, a position slightly below the position where the contact with the lower end surface Uns starts to be set is set as the upper limit of movement of the hook member 333b. As a result, when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven), the hook-shaped member 333b rises to the position shown in FIG. 22 (a), and then the lever member 334b is rotated by its own weight in the reverse direction. The upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 22A).

  Therefore, compared with the case where the saddle member 333b pushes the lever member 334b to the end position by exciting (driving) the solenoid 2333, the movable upper cover member 332 is in the retracted state due to irregular causes such as dimensional errors. Even after this, the hook-shaped member 333b rises and a load in the push-up direction is applied to the lever member 334b, so that the possibility that an excessive load is applied to the lever member 334b and the movable upper cover member 332 can be reduced. . In other words, the accuracy required for the upper limit stop position of the hook-shaped member 333b can be lowered.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 is released, the movable upper cover member 332 changes to the overhanging state and the movable effect member 2360 changes to the standing state. Then, when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven), only the movable effect member 2360 starts to operate, and then the movable upper member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 are interlocked (the movable upper member 332 moves while the movable effect member 2360 continues to operate). Then, after the movable effect member 2360 is stopped, only the moving upper cover member 332 slides, and after the hook-shaped member 333b of the solenoid 2333 reaches the moving end, the lever member 334b is rotated by its own weight. Accordingly, the movable upper lid member 332 slides backward, and the movable upper lid member 332 stops in the retracted state. To.

  In short, the movement start member 2360 is earlier than the moving upper lid member 332, and the movement end is earlier than the movable stage member 2360.

  Here, although the operation end timing of the movable effect member 2360 depends on the weight and weight ratio of the movable effect member 2360, in this embodiment, the transmission portion 2364 of the movable effect member 2360 is in the form of an extended bar of the second transmission member 2350. It is designed to follow the movement while being in contact with the portion 2353 (so that the gap between the extended rod-like portion 2353 and the transmission portion 2364 is suppressed before the movable effect member 2360 is tilted). . Therefore, the moving speed of the second transmission member 2350 directly affects the speed of the tilting operation of the movable effect member 2360.

  As can be seen from the drive modes described above with reference to FIGS. 22 to 25, the transmission path through which the driving force of the solenoid 2333 is transmitted to the movable upper cover member 332 and the transmission path through which the movable effect member 2360 is transmitted start from the solenoid 2333. And different routes.

  Thereby, in this embodiment, the grade by which the load given from the game ball to the movable upper lid member 332 is transmitted to the movable effect member 2360 can be reduced. In addition, since it is not necessary to physically connect the transmission path for transmitting the driving force to the movable upper cover member 332 and the transmission path for transmitting the driving force to the movable effect member 2360 at an intermediate position, the degree of freedom in design is improved. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the relationship between the operation by excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 and the operation of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 will be described with a timing chart.

  FIG. 26A to FIG. 26C are diagrams showing time changes in the positions and states of the movable upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, and the movable effect member 2360 in the present embodiment. 26A shows a timing chart when the movable upper lid member 332 is opened and closed. In FIGS. 26B and 26C, the movable upper lid member 332 is maintained in the closed state. A timing chart for driving the movable effect member 2360 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, the state of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 changes with the switching between excitation and non-excitation of the solenoid 2333, but a time difference occurs as described above. Hereinafter, it demonstrates in order.

  When the solenoid 2333 starts to be excited (driven) at the first time point t1, the movable effect member 2360 starts operating in conjunction with the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c of the solenoid 2333, and the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are at the upper ends. The movable effect member 2360 is in a tilted state at a third time point t3 before the fourth time point t4.

  On the other hand, due to the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333, the movable upper cover member 332 starts the sliding operation toward the retracted state at the second time point t2 after the first time point t1 and before the third time point t3. The moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state at substantially the same timing as the fourth time point t4.

  That is, the movable effect member 2360 operates in response to the operation of the moving upper cover member 332, but starts the operation before the moving upper cover member 332 starts operating. In other words, the movable effect member 2360 starts to operate at a timing that is a predetermined period before, based on the timing at which the movable upper lid member 332 starts to operate.

  Here, “substantially” of “substantially equivalent” means that the saddle-shaped member 333b is disposed at the upper end position with the lower end surface Uns of the saddle-shaped member 333b and the lever member 334b in contact (fourth time point t4). ) And a time difference from the lower end surface Uns away from the bowl-shaped member 333b until the movable upper cover member 332 is disposed in the retracted state, and these are regarded as simultaneous points.

  When the solenoid 2333 starts to be de-energized (driven) at the fifth time point t5, the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c of the solenoid 2333 start operating at a timing substantially equal to that at the fifth time point t5. At the seventh time point t7 before the eighth time point t8 when the shape member 333b and the claw portion 2333c reach the lower end, the movable upper cover member 332 is in an overhanging state. The “substantially” of “substantially equivalent” here has the same intention as described above.

  On the other hand, the release of the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 causes the movable effect member 2360 to start rotating toward the standing state at the sixth time point t6 after the fifth time point t5 and before the seventh time point t7. Then, at the eighth time point t8, the movable effect member 2360 is in the standing state.

  The relative time relationship between the respective times t1 to t8 shown in FIG. 26 (a) is the same as the positional relationship between the operation start and end points of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 with respect to the movable range of the solenoid 2333. I'm doing it. More specifically, the second point from the first time point t1 side among the points that divide the first time point t1 and the fourth time point t4 into seven equal parts is the second time point t2, and from the first time point t1 side. The third point is the third time point t3. Further, since each time point t5 to t8 is illustrated in a mirrored relationship with respect to each time point t1 to t4, the same applies to each time point t5 to t8.

  In the present embodiment, the coil and the iron core are configured so that it takes 0.1 second for the solenoid 2333 to reach from the lower end to the upper end by driving (excitation), and similarly, the return spring reaches from the upper end to the lower end. The urging force of the return spring is set so that 0.1 second is required. These configurations and settings can be arbitrarily set according to the purpose.

  As is clear from the description with reference to FIG. 26A again, the movable effect member 2360 and the movable upper lid member 332 are linked with the operation of excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333, but the movable effect member 2360 and the movable upper lid member 332 The operation timing is not simultaneous and there is a time difference.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), the time difference described above indicates that the movable effect member 2360 is in an upright state as compared with a period (t2 to t7) in which the movable upper cover member 332 is in a state change from the extended state. The period (t1 to t8) during which the state is changing is lengthened. Similarly, the time difference described above is a period (t3 to t6) in which the movable effect member 2360 is maintained in a tilted state as compared to a period (t4 to t5) in which the movable upper lid member 332 is maintained in the retracted state. Lengthen.

  When the player can visually recognize the operation modes of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 through the front plate member 2320, the player directly enters the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 15). Period during which the movable upper cover member 332 is in a retracted state (a state in which a game ball is allowed to enter), which acts as an act (switches whether the game ball is permitted to be entered or restricted in a retracted state or an extended state) The movable effect member 2360 is in a tilted state (a state where it is easy to pick up a game ball). Thereby, compared with the case where only the moving upper lid member 332 is visually recognized by the player, it is possible to give an impression that the game ball easily enters the specific winning opening 65a.

  In addition, since the moving upper cover member 332 has a sliding motion in the front-rear direction, the change in state may be difficult to recognize in front view. However, in this embodiment, the movable upper cover member 332 is movable in conjunction with the moving upper cover member 332. The member 2360 is opened and closed by tilting (turning) to the front side. At this time, the design (the front design) that the player has visually recognized when the movable effect member 2360 is in the standing state faces downward because the movable effect member 2360 is tilted, and is not visible to the player. The appearance changes greatly. In addition, when the movable effect member 2360 is in the tilted state, the movable upper lid member 332 is maintained in the retracted state.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, by visually recognizing the switching of the state of the movable effect member 2360, the state of the moving upper lid member 332 can be grasped without directly viewing the moving upper lid member 332. Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the moving upper lid member 332 as compared with the case where only the moving upper lid member 332 operates.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, there is one that performs a notification such as “Aim at the attacker” with a liquid crystal display or voice, etc. in accordance with the timing at which a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65 a, In general, the time interval between the notification timing and the timing at which a game ball can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a varies as the model changes. For this reason, when the timing from the notification until the game ball can actually enter the specific prize opening 65a is long, the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific prize opening 65a even though the game ball is fired according to the notification However, the specific winning opening 65a does not change to a state that allows a game ball to enter, so that the game ball may pass without being able to enter the specific winning opening 65a. It was.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, by confirming the timing when the movable effect member 2360 starts to move toward the tilted state, the player is not indirect notification such as a liquid crystal effect or voice, but the moving upper cover member 332. As a direct notification of the movement of the member that is interlocked with the above movement with a certain time lag, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the moving upper lid member 332 starts operating before the moving upper lid member 332 starts operating. Therefore, the player can start launching the game ball toward the specific winning port 65a without hesitation with certainty of the timing at which the specific winning port 65a allows the game ball to enter.

  In addition, by grasping the timing at which the moving upper cover member 332 starts to operate before the moving upper cover member 332 starts to operate, the game ball is compared with the case where the game ball is launched after confirming the operation of the moving upper cover member 332. The timing of launching can be advanced. Thereby, it is possible to shorten the period from when the movable upper lid member 332 is actually allowed to pass the game ball to when the game ball passes through the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being extended.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 26A, a time difference occurs between the operation of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 2360, so that the game ball is moved between the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 2360. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a ball bite that bites.

  As shown in FIG. 26B, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 2333 is released at the second time point t2 (or timing immediately before), the state of the movable upper cover member 332 does not change and only the movable effect member 2360 is present. Changes state. Specifically, the state change is started from the standing state toward the tilted state, and the state change that returns to the standing state before the tilted state is executed is executed. By performing such drive control, the state of the movable upper cover member 332 is maintained in the overhanging state (closed state) with a single driving device (solenoid 2333) (that is, the ball to the specific winning opening 65a). The player's attention to the moving upper cover member 332 can be improved by operating the movable effect member 2360 while preventing winning).

  Here, since the movable effect member 2360 is a member that operates in accordance with the opening / closing operation of the movable upper lid member 332, the movable upper member 332 also starts to operate with respect to the player by operating the movable effect member 2360. You can have the expectation that you might.

  As shown in FIG. 26C, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 2333 is released at the third time point t3 (or the timing immediately before it), the change in the state of the movable upper cover member 332 is kept up to the closing reference state. The movable effect member 2360 changes state. Specifically, the state change is started from the standing state toward the tilted state, and the state change that returns to the standing state after the tilted state is executed is executed. By performing such drive control, the state of the movable upper cover member 332 is maintained in the closed state (between the extended state and the closed reference state) with a single drive device (solenoid 2333) (that is, a specific prize is awarded). The player's attention to the moving upper lid member 332 can be improved by operating the movable effect member 2360 while preventing the ball 65 from winning the ball 65a.

  In the drive control shown in FIG. 26C, since the movable effect member 2360 has a larger operation width than the drive control shown in FIG. Compared with the drive control shown in b), it is possible to make the player easily recognize the state change of the movable effect member 2360.

  Here, since the movable effect member 2360 is a member that operates in accordance with the opening / closing operation of the movable upper lid member 332, the movable upper member 332 also starts to operate with respect to the player by operating the movable effect member 2360. You can have the expectation that you might.

  Drive control for operating the movable effect member 2360 with the movable upper lid member 332 maintained in the closed state as shown in FIGS. 26B and 26C is performed at various timings regardless of whether or not there is a big hit game. It is feasible.

  For example, it can be executed once or multiple times during the opening time OP of the jackpot game (before the start of the round game R) or the interval between rounds (after the end of the round game R and before the next round game R starts) Further, it is possible to give the player an impression that the moving upper lid member 332 is opened (excessively for a long time and a large number of times).

  Further, for example, in the jackpot game, the player can be notified of the timing of the open state by executing the game once or a plurality of times immediately before the timing of the next open state. In addition, when this control is used when the specific winning opening 65a is arranged in two places and a member for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a such as the movable upper cover member 332 is provided in each of them, the movable effect member 2360 is used. This is particularly effective since it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize which specific winning opening 65a will be opened next. At the time of execution of this control, a notification indicating the launch position of the sphere, such as “Aim at the A (or B) attacker”, is executed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, thereby producing a liquid crystal effect and an effect by the movable effect member 2360. Thus, it is possible to indicate the launch position of the ball to the player in double.

  Also, for example, it may be an example of an effect in the case where the special symbol is not selected. In this case, for example, on the third symbol display device 81, the message “Big hit when the attacker is released” is displayed, and if the special symbol lottery is a big win, the control shown in FIG. 26 (a) is started. If the special symbol lottery is missed, the control shown in FIG. 26B or 26C may be started. Thereby, attention to the moving upper lid member 332 as an attacker can be improved with high probability, and the player's tension can be maintained until immediately before the moving upper lid member 332 is opened.

  Further, for example, the operation when the special symbol lottery is a small hit may be the operation shown in FIG. 26B or 26C. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the moving upper lid member 332 and passing through the specific winning opening 65a at the small hit.

  In addition, for example, a round-up effect (an effect that informs that there is an additional jackpot round in the middle of the jackpot game. For example, if a special design lottery results in eight rounds, four rounds will be played at the start of the jackpot game. In the jackpot game with “+4 rounds” by the end of the jackpot game, it is reported as “+4 rounds” by the end of the jackpot game, and as a result, an effect that informs the player of the 8 rounds jackpot and “+4 rounds” ? "Is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, among the already notified rounds, at the timing of the end of the final round and the start of the next round (starting if there is an additional round), If there is an additional round, the drive control of FIG. 26 (a) is continued, and if there is no additional round, FIG. 26 (b) or FIG. 26 (c). It may be executed driving control.

  In this case, by operating the movable effect member 2360, it is possible to make the player feel as if the additional round starts. Therefore, regardless of the presence or absence of the additional round, the round started if there is an additional round. Up to the timing at which the next round game R may be started (for example, the timing at which the fifth round game R can be expected to start) can be maintained with the player's interest being improved.

  In the present embodiment, the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main control device, but may be driven and controlled by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device.

  With reference to FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, FIG. 28A, and FIG. 28B, the flow-down mode of the game ball that has passed through the movable upper lid member 332 will be described. 27A and 27B are partial front views of the game board 13, and FIGS. 28A and 28B are partial front perspective views of the game board 13.

  27 (a) and 28 (a) illustrate the retracted state of the movable upper lid member 332 and the tilted state of the movable effect member 2360 (see FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b)). In (b) and FIG. 28 (b), the extended state of the movable upper cover member 332 and the standing state of the movable effect member 2360 are illustrated (see FIG. 25 (a) and FIG. 25 (b)).

  The state shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 28 (a) and the state shown in FIGS. 27 (b) and 28 (b) are alternately switched. Since the movable upper lid member 332 that opens and closes the specific winning opening 65a is configured to be able to hold (roll) the game ball on the upper surface in a closed state (extended state), the movable upper lid member 332 is opened. Immediately after the state changes to the state (retracted state), a situation in which the game ball on the moving upper lid member 332 falls frequently occurs.

  In the present embodiment, it takes an average of 1 second or more until the game ball is discharged to the outside of the moving upper lid member 332 (over the left and right ends) after getting on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332. The inclination and the rebound coefficient of the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 are set. Therefore, in a state in which the game ball is continuously fired, the period during which the game ball is on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 is configured to be long. In other words, even when the opening time of the moving upper lid member 332 is short, the moving upper lid member 332 is configured to easily move the game ball toward the specific winning opening 65a by changing the state to the open state (retracted state). Can do.

  In this embodiment, when the game balls are fired at intervals of the shortest 0.6 seconds, as described above, the game balls reach the moving upper lid member 332 at intervals of about 0.75 seconds. The next game ball can reach the upper surface of the movable upper lid member 332 before the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the movable upper lid member 332 is discharged to the outside of the movable upper lid member 332. That is, it is possible to maintain a state in which one or more game balls are arranged on the upper surface of the movable upper lid member 332. Therefore, it is possible to easily configure the game ball toward the specific winning opening 65a by changing the state of the movable upper lid member 332 to the open state (retracted state).

  In addition, the gap vertically below the light irradiation device 311b and vertically above the movable upper lid member 332 is configured as a gap through which the game ball cannot enter (less than the diameter of the game ball). Accordingly, the game ball rides on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 and rolls on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 at positions left and right outward from the left and right ends of the light irradiation device 311b.

  Therefore, after the upper surface of the movable upper cover member 332 rolls to the left and right for a while, when the game ball falls due to the movable upper cover member 332 being opened (retracted), the game ball is subsequently movable. After rolling the upper surface of the production member 2360 and the upper surface of the extended floor portion 2331e inward in the left-right direction, the sensor S is passed. That is, since the path of the game ball to the sensor S is detoured to the left and right, the period until the game ball passes the sensor S can be kept long.

  When the game ball is on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 in the state shown in FIG. 28A, the state is switched to the state shown in FIG. 28B (excitation (driving) of the solenoid 2333 is released. 26 (a)), the game ball on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 is lifted as the movable effect member 2360 operates. In FIG. 28A, the outer shape of the movable effect member 2360 during the operation is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  With the standing motion of the movable effect member 2360, the game balls riding on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 are moved forward and backward (moved between the movable effect member 2360 and the front plate member 2320, the first path D1 or the concave). The second path D2) that slides down the back side of the installation part 2365 and falls downward, or the third side that faces the back side above the plate-like part that is closer to the left and right than the recessed part 2365 of the movable effect member 2360. It is pushed to the back side along the route D3 and gets on the extended floor 2331e.

  The game ball pushed into the back side and flowing down toward the extended floor portion 2331e receives an upward load and jumps up toward the lower surface of the plate-like portion 332a1 of the moving upper lid member 332. Here, the plate-shaped portion 332a1 is configured to rise and incline toward the center in the left-right direction as described above.

  That is, compared to the first distance H1 between the plate-like portion 332a1 at the left and right end portions of the recessed portion 2365 and the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360, the plate on the left and right outer sides than the left and right end portions of the recessed portion 2365. The second distance H2 between the shape portion 332a1 and the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 is set shorter.

  Therefore, when the game ball collides with the plate-shaped portion 332a1, a reaction force acts toward the lower left and right inner sides where the sensor S is arranged, and the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction toward the sensor S. Thereby, compared with the case where the movable production | presentation member 2360 is maintained in the inclined state, the period until a game ball passes the sensor S can be shortened (a period can be reduced to about a half).

  Note that, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the second distance H2 is set with a dimension equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. That is, even when the moving upper cover member 332 is closed immediately after the game ball has dropped to the front side of the specific winning opening 65a in the vicinity of the left and right end portions of the moving upper cover member 332, the operation of the moving upper cover member 332 is changed to the game ball. It can be made difficult to be disturbed.

  The game ball riding on the extended floor portion 2331e flows down toward the lower passage 331b through the fourth path D4 along the inclination of the extended floor portion 2331e. In other words, it flows down toward the center position in the left-right direction of the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the movable effect member 2360 does not start to operate from the tilted state before the movable upper lid member 332 starts to operate from the retracted state (see FIG. 28A). Therefore, at least while the movable upper cover member 332 is in the retracted state and the game ball can pass through the front side of the movable upper cover member 332, the movable effect member 2360 can be placed on the upper surface (tilted state). (See FIG. 28A). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a game ball will be placed on the front side of the movable effect member 2360.

  In the present embodiment, even when the game ball is arranged on the front side of the movable effect member 2360, the game ball passes between the recessed portion 2365 and the inner rail 61 and reaches the lower passage 331b. Since it is possible to flow down (see the route C2a in FIG. 28B), it is possible to prevent the game ball from staying on the front side of the movable effect member 2360.

  Further, in the state immediately before the movable effect member 2360 starts to operate from the tilted state (see FIGS. 23A and 23B), the distance between the movable upper cover member 332 and the front plate member 2320 is the game ball. (Closed reference state). That is, when the moving upper cover member 332 moves from the retracted state to the extended state, before the moving upper cover member 332 is disposed at a position where the game ball cannot pass through the front side of the moving upper cover member 332. The movable effect member 2360 is maintained in a tilted state. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the front side of the movable upper cover member 332 after the movable upper cover member 332 starts to move toward the extended state, the game ball is arranged on the front side of the movable effect member 2360. The possibility that a situation will occur can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the movable effect member 2360 is moved before the movable upper cover member 332 starts to operate from the extended state (see FIG. 28B) (before the movable effect member 2360 is separated from the front plate member 2320 to the extent that the game ball can pass). Since the operation starts from the standing state toward the tilted state, for example, the game ball flows down on the front side of the movable effect member 2360 before the operation of the movable effect member 2360 starts, and between the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61, for example. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which game balls are sandwiched and load is applied to each other.

  Here, when a game ball is sandwiched between the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61 and a situation in which loads are applied to each other frequently occurs, fatigue is accumulated in the movable effect member 2360 due to the repeated load, The service life of the movable effect member 2360 tends to be short. Therefore, in order to extend the service life, it is easy to cope with arranging the movable effect member 2360 in an arrangement where no load is generated. For example, the movable effect member 2360 may be arranged such that the distance between the lower surface of the tilted movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61 is larger than the diameter of the game ball.

  However, since it is necessary to raise the arrangement of the movable upper lid member 332 as well as the movable effect member 2360, this is one advantage associated with the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a along the inner rail 61. The effect of lowering the lower end of the display area (or viewing area) of the display device 81 is reduced by half.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the operation timing of the movable effect member 2360 with respect to the movable upper lid member 332 is defined from the structure (see FIGS. 22 to 25), so that the position between the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61 is increased. Since the situation where the game balls are sandwiched between the two and the load is applied to each other is suppressed, the distance between the lower surface of the tilted movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61 is movable to a position smaller than the diameter of the game balls. Even when the effect member 2360 is disposed, the useful life of the movable effect member 2360 can be sufficiently ensured.

  Thereby, even if it is a case provided with the movable production | presentation member 2360, since the arrangement | positioning of the movement upper cover member 332 can be maintained downward, the lower end of the display area (or visual recognition area) of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is lowered | hung. The effect can be retained.

  Further, in the state immediately after the movable effect member 2360 is tilted from the standing state (see FIGS. 23A and 23B), the distance between the movable upper cover member 332 and the front plate member 2320 is a game. Less than the diameter of the sphere (closed reference condition). In other words, when the movable upper lid member 332 moves from the extended state to the retracted state, before the movable upper lid member 332 is disposed at a position where the game ball can pass through the front side of the movable upper lid member 332. The movable effect member 2360 is in a tilted state. Thus, even when the game ball passes through the front side of the movable upper cover member 332 after the movable upper cover member 332 starts to move toward the retracted state, the game ball is arranged on the front side of the movable effect member 2360. The possibility that a situation will occur can be reduced.

  Accordingly, even when the movable effect member 2360 is provided, the arrangement of the movable upper lid member 332 can be maintained downward, and thus the effect of lowering the lower end of the display area (or viewing area) of the third symbol display device 81 is achieved. Can be held.

  Note that in this embodiment, the stepped portions 2324a arranged on the left and right sides of the movable effect member 2360 prevent the game balls from flowing from the left and right toward the movable effect member 2360. Thereby, since the path of the game ball toward the movable effect member 2360 can be limited to the vertical direction only, the correspondence between the movement upper cover member 332 arranged above the movable effect member 2360 and the movable effect member 2360 is supported. The durability of the movable effect member 2360 can be improved only by defining the relationship.

  As shown in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B, the game ball that has passed the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 is guided to the lower passage 331b mainly through two paths and passes the sensor S ( Detected).

  One of the two routes is a route that passes through the third route D3 and the fourth route D4. When a game ball that can flow down on this route is on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360, when the movable effect member 2360 starts to move up, the game ball that has been on the upper surface is pushed to the rear surface side. Therefore, compared with the case where the game ball flows down only by its own weight, the timing at which the game ball passes through the sensor S can be easily advanced (the period can be reduced to about half).

  Of the two routes, the other route is a route through which the game ball flows into the lower passage 331b from the front side. The event that the game ball flows down on the other path is when the game ball that has been on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 flows down through the first path D1 or the second path D2 and reaches the front side of the lower path 331b. And at least the case where it does not ride on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360, flows down the front side of the movable effect member 2360, passes through the path C2a, and reaches the front side of the lower passage 331b.

  In the present embodiment, the movable effect member 2360 maintains the tilted state at the timing when the movable upper cover member 332 starts to move from the retracted state, and is set after the movable upper cover member 332 is extended. (See FIG. 26 (a)), an event occurs that the vehicle flows down the front side of the movable effect member 2360 without riding on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 and reaches the front side of the lower passage 331b through the path C2a. The possibility can be reduced.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, at the timing when the movable effect member 2360 is given a load that operates from the tilted state to the standing state (see FIGS. 23A and 23B), Since the gap with the front plate member 2320 is less than the diameter of the game ball (closed reference state), most of the game balls that have passed through the front side of the movable upper cover member 332 are directed toward the movable effect member 2360 in a tilted state. Flow down. Therefore, the possibility that an event of flowing down the front side of the movable effect member 2360 without reaching the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 and reaching the front side of the lower passage 331b through the path C2a can be extremely reduced.

  Whether the game ball flows down the upper surface of the extended floor portion 2331e is clearly different between the above-described one route and the other route. That is, in this embodiment, the path (one path) through which the game ball flows down the upper surface of the extended floor portion 2331e and passes the sensor S, and the game ball does not flow down the upper surface of the extended floor portion 2331e. A route passing through S (the other route) is formed.

  Here, the game balls that flow down one path and the other path described above are the same in that they finally pass the sensor S, but the flow path is clearly different. Correspondingly, the flow speed of the game ball can be changed.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the extended floor portion 2331e with respect to the horizontal plane is designed to be smaller than the inclination angle of the inner rail 61 and the lower passage 331b with respect to the horizontal plane. Therefore, compared with the game ball flowing down one path, the time required for the game ball flowing down the other path to pass the sensor S after reaching the front side of the specific winning opening 65a is shortened. (The period can be halved).

  Since the flow of the game ball in the other path is likely to occur immediately before the movable effect member 2360 moves toward the standing state, in this case, the front of the specific winning opening 65a immediately before the movable upper cover member 332 is closed. The game ball that has reached the side can be quickly detected by the sensor S (can be discharged to the rear of the specific winning opening 65a). Therefore, the first interval time Int1 between rounds in a jackpot game to be described later can be set short.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, the shaft-side end surface of the recessed portion 2365 (the end surface disposed on the rear side of FIG. 28A) is a surface position with the left and right end surfaces of the lower passage 331b. Therefore, when the game ball flows downward along the second path D2 through the recessed portion 2365, the game ball is prevented from rebounding by colliding with the left and right end surfaces of the lower passage 331b from above. That is, the resistance of the game ball flowing down along the second path D2 can be reduced, and the time required for the game ball riding on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 to be detected by the sensor S can be shortened.

  Even if the axial side end surface of the recessed portion 2365 is disposed closer to the center in the left-right direction than the left and right end surfaces of the lower passage 331b (even if the left-right width of the recessed portion 2365 is shortened in the left-right center symmetry), the same There is an effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the substantial left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a changes depending on whether the movable effect member 2360 is tilted or standing. The “substantial left-right width” refers to the left-right width of the opening through which the game ball can pass in the front-rear direction.

  That is, in the tilted state of the movable effect member 2360 shown in FIGS. 27A and 28A, a substantial left and right width is formed with the same length as the left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a, while FIG. In the standing state of the movable effect member 2360 shown in b) and FIG. 28B, the left and right width of the recessed portion 2365 (that is, the left and right width of the lower passage 331b) is a substantial left and right width.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 (a), 27 (b), 28 (a), and 28 (b), the substantial left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a changes depending on the state of the movable effect member 2360. The impression of the player who visually recognizes the specific winning opening 65a changes.

  Here, when the player visually recognizes the specific winning opening 65a, it is viewed from the front through the light-transmitting front plate member 2320 (see FIG. 27), or when the non-transparent moving upper cover member 332 is retracted, the moving upper cover member 332 There are two ways to see from above.

  In the case of the front view, if only the moving upper cover member 332 is provided, the shape of the front view does not change even if the state of the moving upper cover member 332 changes, so the difference is difficult to understand. Since the substantial left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a is changed by the movable effect member 2360 visually recognized larger than 332 and the change in the design of the front view is clearly visible, the specific winning opening 65a is opened. The player can be made to recognize the difference between being closed and closed (can be easily identified).

  In addition, when viewed from above, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the overhanging state, the movable effect member 2360 is also difficult to see, and it is clear that the substantial left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a is narrow (the left-right width of the lower passage 331b). (Refer to FIG. 28 (b)). On the other hand, when the moving upper cover member 332 is retracted, it is obvious that the movable effect member 2360 that is visually recognized larger than the moving upper cover member 332 is tilted and the specific winning opening 65a is largely opened. The difference in opening and closing of the winning opening 65a can be impressively recognized by the player, and it can be easily identified that a game ball can be inserted into the specific winning opening 65a (FIG. 28A). reference).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 27A and 28A, when the movable upper cover member 332 is in the retracted state and the movable effect member 2360 is in the tilted state, Since the width is substantially the same as the left and right width, it is possible to reduce the flow resistance of the game ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a.

  Furthermore, in addition to the at least two flow paths of the game balls being configured, the flow speed of the game balls flowing down on each flow path (the period required for detection by the sensor S) is configured to vary. Therefore, even when many game balls flow into the front side of the specific winning opening 65a in a short time, the degree to which the game balls stay can be reduced. Thereby, since the period until the game ball that has passed the front side of the movable upper lid member 332 is detected by the sensor S can be kept short, it is possible to suppress the excessive occurrence of over winning.

  The over winning is an example of “an event in which a game ball passes the front side of the moving upper cover member 332 beyond the maximum value of the number of passages that is expected while the moving upper cover member 332 maintains the retracted state”. Refers to that. Since the number of game balls detected by the sensor S is the same as the number of game balls passing through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332, the number of game balls detected by the sensor S is naturally “scheduled” when an over winning is generated. Exceeds the maximum number of passages allowed.

  In other words, over-winning means that more than the planned number of winning balls is paid out to the player, so the player can get more profit, but over-winning often If it is possible to cause the game to occur, it may be possible to make a game far from the scheduled game performance (ball-out performance). Therefore, from the viewpoint of fairness, it is desirable to be able to suppress over winning.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 27 (b) and 28 (b), when the movable upper cover member 332 is in the overhanging state and the movable effect member 2360 is in the standing state, The substantial left-right width is narrowed to the left-right width of the recessed portion 2365.

  Thus, by limiting the flow path of the game balls flowing down the front side of the specific winning port 65a, it is possible to increase the flow resistance when a plurality of game balls enter the front side of the specific winning port 65a. . That is, it is possible to extend the period required for a plurality of game balls to pass through the specific winning opening 65a and to accumulate the game balls on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a.

  More specifically, the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state by causing the game ball that has entered first to function as an obstacle to flow of the follow-up game ball rather than reducing the flow velocity of the game ball that has entered first. Although the operation is started from the extended state to the extended state, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from passing the front side of the moving upper lid member 332. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of over winning.

  From the above, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the substantial left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a is changed, so that the game ball that is over-winning is sensored in a double sense, that is, first, Secondly, in the sense of shortening the period until it is detected by S, secondly, when there are a plurality of game balls that are over-winning, the game ball that has entered first will further interfere with the follow-up game ball. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of over winning in the sense of preventing winning.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The second transmission member 2350 and the movable effect member 2360 are not in contact with each other when the moving upper lid member 332 starts to move from the retracted state to the extended state as the solenoid 2333 is de-energized (driven). did. Thus, while adopting a configuration in which the movable effect member 2360 is operated by the driving force of the solenoid 2333, the operation start of the movable upper cover member 332 from the retracted state to the extended state starts from the excitation (drive) release timing of the solenoid 2333. Delays can be prevented.

  A movable effect member 2360 that makes it easier for the player to visually recognize a state change due to the operation than the moving upper cover member 332 is arranged on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a, and the movable effect member exceeds the period during which the moving upper cover member 332 maintains the retracted state. 2360 maintained the tilted state. Thereby, it is possible to give the player an impression that the game ball easily enters the specific winning opening 65a.

  In addition, during the period in which the movable effect member 2360 is in the tilted state, the movable upper cover member 332 is maintained in the retracted state, so that the movable effect member is not required to be directly visually recognized (even if it is difficult to visually recognize). By confirming the state of 2360, it can be determined whether or not the movable upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state.

  Since the operation of the movable effect member 2360 and the operation of the movable upper cover member 332 occur with a certain time lag, the effect of the third symbol display device 81 or the like is not physically (mechanically) interlocked with the movable upper cover member 332. Compared with the case where the player grasps the opening timing of the specific winning opening 65a based on the above, attention can be paid to the operation of the movable effect member 2360 as reliable information. This eliminates the dissatisfaction of the player not knowing when to launch the game ball because the time difference from when “Aim at the attacker” is displayed until the specific winning opening 65a is actually opened is unknown. can do.

  Although not shown in the present embodiment, the light irradiation unit 331c1 (see FIG. 10B) and the light path E1 (see FIG. 11A) intersect the movable effect member 2360. It may be arranged at a position, and the timing of turning on / off the light irradiation unit 331c1 may be controlled in accordance with the operation timing of the movable effect member 2360.

  In this case, simultaneously with the tilting operation of the movable effect member 2360, light is emitted (emits light) from the light irradiation unit 331c1 to the movable effect member 2360, so that the attention of the movable effect member 2360 can be improved. In addition, as described above, since the timing of the tilting operation of the movable effect member 2360 is before the timing at which the movable upper cover member 332 is in the open state, before the ball can pass through the specific winning opening 65a, The player's attention can be improved.

  Note that the timing of turning on / off the light irradiation unit 331c1 may be set to the operation timing of the movable upper lid member 332, or set between the tilt timing of the movable effect member 2360 and the operational timing of the movable upper lid member 332. May be. In this case, since light is emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 after the movable effect member 2360 starts the tilting operation, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the movable effect member 2360 is in the tilted state.

  While the game ball can pass through the front side of the movable upper lid member 332, the movable effect member 2360 maintains the tilted state. Thereby, possibility that the situation where a game ball will be arrange | positioned at the front side of the movable production | presentation member 2360 arises can be made low. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a game ball enters between the inner rail 61 and the surface of the movable effect member 2360 that faces the inner rail 61 of the main body plate portion 2361 and causes a load on each other.

  Before the movable upper cover member 332 starts operating from the extended state, the movable effect member 2360 is configured to start moving toward the tilted state. As a result, the game ball is arranged on the front side of the movable effect member 2360 before the operation of the movable effect member 2360 is started, and the game ball is sandwiched between the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61, and loads are applied to each other. The possibility of occurring can be reduced. Moreover, since the space | interval between the movable production | presentation member 2360 and the inner rail 61 can be made into less than the diameter of a game ball, the arrangement | positioning of the movable upper cover member 332 can be maintained downward, and, as a result, 3rd design The lower end of the display area of the display device 81 can be lowered.

  By configuring the game ball that has fallen on the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 to rebound upward by the movable effect member 2360, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the game ball can be confirmed by the player's line of sight. Thereby, the possibility of missing a game ball that has dropped on the front side of the movable upper lid member 332 can be reduced.

  Further, since the upward rebound is increased when the movable effect member 2360 is moved toward the standing state, the upper cover member is moved particularly when the movable effect member 2360 is in operation (just before the movable upper cover member 332 is closed). The possibility of missing a game ball that has dropped from the front side of 332 can be reduced.

  When the game ball collided with the movable effect member 2360 and bounced back toward the moving upper cover member 332 collides with the moving upper cover member 332, a reaction force is applied in a direction toward the sensor S. Thereby, the period required for the game ball to reach the sensor S can be shortened.

  The game ball that has passed through the moving upper lid member 332 is configured to flow down toward the sensor S through two distinct paths. Thus, even when a large number of game balls flow into the front side of the specific winning opening 65a in a short time, the degree to which the game balls stay can be lowered (smooth time can be shortened, smooth). ).

  The substantial (left and right) width of the specific winning opening 65a through which the game ball that has passed the moving upper lid member 332 passes is configured to be changeable with the state change of the moving upper lid member 332. Thereby, depending on whether the movable upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state or the extended state, the resistance to flow when the game ball placed on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a passes through the specific winning opening 65a is reduced. Can be changed.

  Specifically, when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state and allows the passage of the game ball, the substantial (left and right) width of the specific winning opening 65a is kept long, and the movable upper lid member 332 is in the extended state. In order to restrict the passage of the game ball, the substantial (left and right) width of the specific winning opening 65a is shortened. Thereby, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, it is possible to reduce the flow resistance when the game ball that has passed through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 passes through the specific winning opening 65a, and the movable upper lid member 332 changes to the extended state. Since the flow resistance when the game ball passing through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 passes through the specific winning opening 65a can be increased, the occurrence of over winning can be suppressed (excessive winning as over winning) Can reduce the number of game balls to win.)

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 33. In 2nd Embodiment, although the case where all the game balls on the movable production | presentation member 2360 pass the sensor S arrange | positioned at the back side of the downward channel | path 331b was demonstrated, the board surface lower unit 3300 in 3rd Embodiment is A game ball that has passed through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged on the left side of the front view of the game ball that passes the sensor S by the movable effect member 3360 and the specific winning opening 65a, and detects the passage of the game ball. The game balls are distributed to the game balls passing through S2. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 29 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13 in the third embodiment. In FIG. 29, the retracted state of the movable upper lid member 332 and the tilted state of the movable effect member 3360 are shown. In order to facilitate understanding, the game board 13 is illustrated in a simplified manner. The mechanism for driving the movable effect member 3360 is the same as the first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350 (see FIGS. 18 and 19) described above in the second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the board surface lower unit 3300 in the third embodiment is different from the board surface lower unit 2300 described above in the second embodiment mainly in the following points. That is, the first difference is that the movable effect member 3360 integrally includes a distribution unit 3370 that distributes the flow path of game balls. Second, the second sensor S2 is provided upstream of the sensor S, and the second sensor S2 is configured to be able to detect game balls distributed to the side not directed to the sensor S by the distribution unit 3370, A difference is that a guide inclined surface 3331k for guiding a game ball that has passed through the second sensor S2 is formed on the left extended floor portion 2331e, and a V winning sensor VC is disposed downstream thereof. Hereinafter, it demonstrates in order. First, with reference to FIG. 30, the distribution part 3370 of the movable effect member 3360 will be described.

  30 (a) is a front perspective view of the movable effect member 3360 in a tilted state, and FIG. 30 (b) is a side view of the movable effect member 3360 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. 30 (a). 30 (c) is a top view of the movable effect member 3360 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXc in FIG. 30 (a), and FIG. 30 (d) is a movable effect in the standing state as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. 30 (a). FIG. 46 is a side view of the member 3360.

  For ease of understanding, FIGS. 30B, 30C, and 30D show the second sensor S2, the V winning sensor VC, the extended floor portion 2331e, and the guidance in the assembled state. The game balls distributed to the inclined surface 3331k and the path on the side not facing the sensor S are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 30A to FIG. 30D, the allocating portion 3370 is a rod-shaped portion formed integrally with the movable effect member 3360, and the main body plate portion 2361 starts from the rotation base end side end portion. An extending rod portion 3371 extending along the short width direction of the plate portion 2361, and a main body plate portion 2361 along an arc centering on the support shaft portion 2362 from the extending end portion of the extending rod portion 3371. An extending arc portion 3372 extending in a direction in which the upper surface of the extending arc portion faces, and a first restricting portion extending in parallel with the surface orthogonal to the support shaft portion 2362 from the extending tip end portion of the extending arc portion 3372 3373 and a second restricting portion 3374 extending in parallel with the support shaft portion from the extending tip side portion of the extending arc portion 3372.

  As shown in FIGS. 30B and 30D, the allocating portion 3370 is formed on the movable effect member 3360, and when the movable effect member 3360 is in the standing state, the allocating portion 3370 is extended. It is stored below the floor portion 2331e. In the present embodiment, an interference avoidance recessed portion 3331l for the purpose of avoiding interference with the distribution portion 3370 is provided downward from the extended floor portion 2331e. In other words, the interference avoiding recess 3331l is formed as a recess having a shape that includes at least the movement locus of the sorting unit 3370.

  The game ball passing left and right through the extended floor portion 2331e passes over the interference avoiding recess 3331l (see FIG. 29A), but in this embodiment, the extended rod portion 3371 has a small diameter (diameter). Therefore, the groove width of the interference avoiding recess 3331l at the location where the game ball passes above can be shortened. That is, by setting the groove width to about 2.5 [mm], the degree to which the game ball (diameter 11 [mm]) is caught by the interference avoiding recess 3331l and the game ball is decelerated can be reduced. Therefore, the game ball can smoothly roll on the upper surface of the extended floor portion 2331e.

  The extended bar portion 3371 is disposed below the extended floor portion 2331e and the guide inclined surface 3331k regardless of the posture of the movable effect member 3360. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the extended bar portion 3371 from coming into direct contact with the game ball. The extended bar portion 3371 is disposed at a position separated from the left end of the specific winning opening 65a by at least the diameter (11 [mm]) of the game ball. Thereby, a game ball can be arranged on the left side of the extended bar portion 3371.

  Since the extended arc portion 3372 has an arc shape centered on the support shaft portion 2362, it is formed from a predetermined arc shape centered on the support shaft portion 2362 even when the movable effect member 2360 changes its posture. Is done. For this reason, it is possible to overlap the motion trajectory when the extended arc portion 3372 rotates, and thus the design can be facilitated.

  The first restricting portion 3373 is a portion that restricts the flow of the game ball entering the second sensor S2 to the right by flowing down the left side of the extending rod portion 3371 toward the back side, and its tip portion The surface shape of the left surface in is a plane orthogonal to the left-right direction axis. Accordingly, the load applied from the game ball toward the first restricting portion 3373 is directed in the axial direction of the movable effect member 3360. Therefore, the movable effect member 3360 is applied by the load applied from the game ball toward the first restricting portion 3373. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a load in the rotational direction.

  Note that the center of gravity of the movable effect member 3360 is designed to be in front of the rotation axis so that it does not rise when the game ball collides with the first restricting portion 3373 from the front side. Therefore, during the winning of the game ball, the movable effect member 3360 can easily maintain the tilted state.

  The second restricting portion 3374 is disposed above the center of the game ball in the tilted state of the movable effect member 3360, contacts the back side of the game ball detected by the second sensor S2, and stops the flow of the game ball. (See FIG. 30 (b)).

  Therefore, the load (self-weight, etc.) applied to the second restricting unit 3374 from the stopped game ball is the direction in which the second restricting unit 3374 is raised, that is, the direction in which the movable effect member 3360 is maintained in the tilted state ( Turn to the left (clockwise direction). Therefore, not only prevents the movable effect member 3360 from getting up from the tilted state due to the load applied from the game ball, but also causes the load of the game ball to act so that the movable effect member 3360 can more easily maintain the tilted state. Can do.

  On the other hand, when the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 26) is released and the movable effect member 3360 operates toward the standing state, the second restricting portion 3374 is. Since it moves in the direction away from the game ball (the direction toward the back side along the circle centered on the support shaft portion 2362), the load from the game ball interferes with the operation of the movable effect member 3360 to the standing state. Can be avoided.

  Accordingly, in the state where the game ball is stopped at the second sensor S2, when the weight of the game ball is utilized for maintaining the state of the movable effect member 3360 and the state of the movable effect member 3360 is intentionally changed, It is possible to avoid that the weight of the sphere interferes with the change in the state of the movable effect member 3360.

  Note that the front shape of the second restricting portion 3374 may be formed such that the normal of the point in contact with the game ball in the tilted state of the movable effect member 3360 faces the radial direction of the support shaft portion 2362. In this case, since the direction of the load applied from the game ball to the second restricting portion 3374 can be the radial direction of the support shaft portion 2362, a load is applied to the rotation direction of the movable effect member 3360 via the game ball. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the second sensor S2 is disposed at a position where the game ball whose flow has been restricted by the second restricting unit 3374 has already been detected and the game ball is not passed through (FIG. 30 ( b) and FIG. 30 (c)). That is, the second restricting unit 3374 stops the game ball after the game ball (at least a part thereof) enters the downstream side of the second sensor S2.

  For this reason, the action of the allocating unit 3370 affects the period required for the game ball to be detected by the second sensor S2 after the movable upper lid member 332 is in the open state (retracted state) (extended or shortened). Can be prevented.

  When the state of the movable effect member 3360 changes from the tilted state to the standing state, as described above, the distribution unit 3370 is stored below the guide inclined surface 3331k, so that the game ball whose flow has been restricted (FIG. 30 ( (b)), the regulation is released, and it is possible to flow along the guide inclined surface 3331k, and the game ball that has flowed down is detected by the V winning sensor VC arranged downstream of the second sensor S2 (FIG. 30 ( d)). Next, with reference to FIG. 31, an example of the flow-down mode of the game ball that has passed the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 (see FIG. 29) will be described.

  FIG. 31A to FIG. 31C are schematic top views schematically showing the movable effect member 3360, the allocating portion 3370, the extended floor portion 2331e, and the guide inclined surface 3331k. In addition, in FIG. 31 (a) to FIG.31 (c), the process in which a game ball passes the specific winning opening 65a (refer FIG. 15) is illustrated in time series. That is, in FIG. 31A, the state where the movable effect member 3360 is tilted and the first game ball P1 is on the upper surface of the movable effect member 3360 is illustrated in FIG. The state in which the second game ball P2 enters from the state and rides on the upper surface of the movable effect member 3360 in FIG. 31C is the number of game balls planned ("specified number" to be described later). Is detected by the sensor S and the second sensor S2, and the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 26A) is released, whereby the state of the movable effect member 3360 changes from the tilted state to the standing state. Each of the states immediately after is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the first game ball P1 can flow down on the second path D2 or the third path D3. When flowing down on the second path D2, the game ball P1 passes through the lower passage 331b and is detected by the sensor S. In this case, the game ball collides with the first restricting portion 3373 protruding to the front side of the second sensor S2, or flows down to the lower passage 331b without colliding.

  On the other hand, when the game ball P1 flows down on the third path D3, the game ball P1 is restricted from flowing rightward by the first restriction unit 3373 or the second sensor S2 of the distribution unit 3370 and is moved rearward by the second restriction unit 3374. By restricting the flow down, the inside of the second sensor S2 is stopped (see FIG. 31B).

  When the game ball P1 is stopped inside the second sensor S2, and the game ball P2 passing through the specific winning opening 65a then flows down along the third path D3, the game ball P2 is connected to the game ball P1. Collision occurs, and the flow path changes to a post-collision path D32.

  The post-collision path D32 is a path that extends from the midway position of the third path D3 toward the lower path 331b. That is, after one game ball stops on the guide inclined surface 3331k, it is detected by the sensor S exclusively through the lower passage 331b. In the present embodiment, the first restricting portion 3373 extends only to the vicinity of the center position of the game ball P1, and does not extend to the front side of the game ball P1, so the flow path of the game ball P2 Can be switched naturally (small resistance) to the post-collision path D32.

  In FIG. 31B, for the sake of convenience, the case where the game ball P1, which is the first ball, is stopped inside the second sensor S2, but the game ball stopped inside the second sensor S2, It is not necessary to be the first game ball. For example, when the fifth game ball stops inside the second sensor S2, the sixth and subsequent game balls can pass exclusively through the post-collision path D32.

  Further, since the game ball passing through the post-collision path D32 passes through the front side of the game ball stopped inside the second sensor S2, the player can visually recognize the game ball stopped inside the second sensor S2. It acts to make sex worse. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the game ball stopped inside the second sensor S2 by the game ball flowing down the path D32 after the collision, so that the game ball stopped inside the second sensor S2 can be visually recognized. While maintaining, the game ball flowing down the post-collision path D32 can be made to act as a blind, and it can be made difficult for the player to notice that the game ball is stopped inside the second sensor S2.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (c), when the movable effect member 3360 changes to the standing state, the game ball P1 that has stopped inside the second sensor S2 flows down to the back side along the inclination of the guide inclined surface 3331k. , Detected by the V winning sensor VC. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 26A) is excited (driven), and the game ball that has reached the front side of the specific winning opening 65a immediately after the movable effect member 3360 is tilted. However, it is possible to prevent the situation that the V winning sensor VC will soon be detected.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31B, the interval between the second sensor S2 and the V winning sensor VC is set to be less than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball can flow down directly from the second sensor S2 to the V prize sensor VC, and the game ball that has passed through the second sensor S2 can be prevented from flowing away from the V prize sensor VC.

  An example of a game that can be realized using the configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing changes in the outputs of the moving upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 3360, the sensor S, the second sensor S2, the regulating valve VB, and the V winning sensor VC in the first operation pattern. . In the drawings of the sensor S, the second sensor S2, and the V winning sensor VC, an ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball is detected. Further, the specified number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a indicates the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the second sensor S2.

  The restriction valve VB is virtually a member that can be switched between an open state that allows a game ball to enter the V prize sensor VC and a closed state that restricts the entry of the game ball to the V prize sensor VC. Is illustrated.

  If the MPU 201 (refer to FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts the control of the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure change display (design change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the movable upper lid member 332 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

  In the case of a predetermined jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the movable upper cover member 332 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). And the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the movable upper cover member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to thereby open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be opened, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  In the long-time operation of the moving upper cover member 332, the moving upper cover member 332 is closed (extended state) when the scheduled closing operation time Ta (5 seconds) has elapsed, and after a predetermined time (1 second in this embodiment) has elapsed. The moving upper cover member 332 is again opened (retracted).

  Note that the scheduled closing operation time Ta is longer than a period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game ball is continuously fired, and a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls. Is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced to the closed state (the extended state) and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. .

  FIG. 32 illustrates an example of a passing state of the game ball detected by the sensor S, the second sensor S2, and the V winning sensor VC when the game ball is continuously fired by the so-called “left strike” described above. That is, in the present embodiment, when a game ball launched by left-hand strike passes the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 29), there is a possibility that one game ball P1 is stopped inside the second sensor S2. Other game balls (game ball P2 or the like) are detected by the sensor S.

  The game ball stopped inside the second sensor S2 passes through the second sensor S2 and is detected by the V winning sensor VC as the movable effect member 3360 changes to the standing state (FIG. 31 (c)). reference). As described above, according to the present embodiment, the V winning sensor VC can be set without restricting the timing of entering the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a by opening the movable upper cover member 332 for a short time. The timing at which the game ball P1 can pass can be limited after the scheduled closing operation time Ta has elapsed since the start of the round game R.

  For this reason, for example, a control for releasing the opening / closing plate for a short time at the start of the round game R in order to prevent erroneous winning of the V winning sensor VC, which is generally seen in a pachinko machine equipped with a V probability variation attacker (for operation of the opening / closing plate) Control with unnaturalness) can be eliminated. Thereby, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate that opens and closes the specific winning opening becomes a natural operation, and it is possible to provide the player with an environment for enjoying the game with peace of mind.

  That is, when the V prize sensor VC is arranged downstream of the second sensor S2 (only a game ball that has passed the second sensor S2 can pass the V prize sensor VC), the moving upper cover member at the start of the round game R It is possible to prevent erroneous winning of the V winning sensor VC without performing control for opening the 332 for a short time.

  Specifically, the regulation valve VB is disposed at a position downstream of the second sensor S2 and upstream of the V winning sensor VC. In the first operation pattern, the restriction valve VB is the time required for the game ball that has passed the second sensor S2 to pass the V winning sensor VC immediately after the scheduled closing operation time Ta has elapsed (in the present embodiment, 0. It is maintained in the open state immediately after the start of the first round game R over the required passage time, which is the time exceeding the scheduled closing operation time Ta for 5 seconds), and is in the closed state as the necessary passage time elapses Changed.

  Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the situation where the game ball passes through the V winning sensor VC, the movable effect member 3360 is tilted when the scheduled closing operation time Ta elapses, and the game ball flows down over the second sensor S2. It can be limited to cases. That is, when the movable upper cover member 332 does not operate in the first operation pattern (for example, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls is won). Until the moving upper lid member 332 does not change to the closed state), the game ball can be configured not to pass the V winning sensor VC. In this case, the distance between the second sensor S2 and the V winning sensor VC can be widened compared to the above-described arrangement (see FIG. 31A), and the V winning is achieved when the regulation valve VB is closed. It is desirable that the sphere be able to flow down a different flow path away from the sensor VC.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the V winning sensor VC during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is shifted to a special symbol probability changing state. That is, in the present embodiment, the movement of the movable upper cover member 332 in the first operation pattern can be one condition for the gaming state to shift to the special symbol probability changing state after the big hit game is over.

  Even in the configuration in which the distance between the second sensor S2 and the V winning sensor VC is less than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 31A), the effective period of the V winning sensor VC is set during the round game R (during the big hit game). In this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained. That is, when the solenoid 2333 is driven in the first operation pattern, the ball can be detected by the V winning sensor VC during the round game R (while the regulating valve VB is in the open state in FIG. 32), while the first When the movable upper cover member 332 does not operate in the operation pattern of 1 and is opened for a long time (for example, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls is won. In the case where the moving upper lid member 332 does not change to the closed state until the occurrence of the event, the timing at which the ball is detected by the V winning sensor VC is the interval period between rounds. Therefore, the solenoid 2333 being driven in the first operation pattern can be set as one condition for the V winning sensor VC to detect a ball during the effective period.

  In the present embodiment, since the V prize sensor VC is arranged downstream of the second sensor S2, when the player keeps firing the game ball by so-called “right-handed”, the game ball is The possibility of passing through the two sensors S2 and the possibility of passing through the V winning sensor VC are extremely low (the possibility of occurrence of so-called “puncture” increases).

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the game is “left-handed” to the player during the round game R in which the game ball is controlled to pass through the V prize sensor VC or before the round game R. Notification (the left-handed navigation described above) that prompts the user to launch a ball is executed by the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, or the like (see FIG. 4). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity to win the V winning sensor VC without noticing.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means solenoid 2333 keeps the movable upper cover member 332 in the closed state (the extended state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R starts after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the moving upper cover member 332 is changed from the closed state (extended state) to the open state ( The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be displaced to the retracted state to open the specific winning opening 65a, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (extension state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between each round game R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the movable upper cover member 332 is closed (the extended state) ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the round game R of the last round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means holds the moving upper cover member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. It is controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  In the present embodiment, control is performed to open and close the movable upper cover member 332 during the round game R so that the game ball can be detected by the second sensor S2 in the round game R, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the moving upper lid member 332 may be controlled to be maintained in the open state (retracted state) during the first operation time T1. In this case, the timing at which the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor VC is limited to the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a after the game ball P1 stops inside the second sensor S2 is exclusively detected by the sensor S. As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (c), the second sensor S2 is arranged closer to the movable effect member 3360 than the sensor S, and therefore the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 15). ) Until the game ball placed on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a is detected by the sensor S, compared to the period required for the game ball placed on the front side to be detected by the second sensor S2. The required time is longer.

  Therefore, by continuing to fire the game ball with the left strike, as compared to the case of firing with the right strike, as represented by the case where the first game ball is detected by the second sensor S2, the prize ball Can be paid out early. On the other hand, since the sensor for detecting the specified number of game balls (in this embodiment, tenth ball) can be limited to the sensor S with a high probability, the specified number of game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to ensure a long period from when it is actually detected.

  That is, in the beginning of the round game R, the game ball is detected early, so that the timing of the payout start is advanced, while at the end of the round game R, the detection of the game ball is delayed to slightly over-win. It can be easily generated.

  In addition, you may arrange | position 2nd sensor S2 in the position of the above-mentioned V prize sensor VC. That is, the second sensor S2 may be arranged behind the second restricting portion 3374. In this case, when the round game R is ended and the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 is released and the movable effect member 3360 is in the standing state, the game ball that has been stopped on the front side of the second sensor S2 (still the second sensor S2). Game balls that are not detected by the second sensor S2). Therefore, when the second sensor S2 is controlled so as to pay out a prize ball every time it detects a game ball, a predetermined number of balls entered into the specific prize opening 65a are detected in the round game R, and the movable upper lid member 332 is closed. Since the game ball stopped on the front side of the second sensor S2 is detected after being set in the (overhanging state), an over winning is frequently generated after the end of each round game R. become.

  In this case, if it is desired to suppress the occurrence of an overwinning, the second sensor S2 is adopted as a simple entrance, and the winning ball is not paid out even after passing through the second sensor S2, and the rules relating to the round game R The number may be detected only by the sensor S. On the other hand, in this case, since the number passing through the moving upper lid member 332 and the number of winning prizes do not coincide with each other, there is a possibility that it is difficult to measure the timing at which the player stops firing the game ball.

  Moreover, you may comprise using another link mechanism so that the movable production | presentation member 2360 may maintain an upright state after progress of the scheduled closing operation time Ta. In this case, after the round game R has ended, the game ball that has been stopped by the second restricting unit 3374 is detected by the second sensor S2, so that it is possible to prevent over-winning from occurring frequently. The two sensors S2 can be employed as a detection sensor having a prize ball. As a result, the number of pieces that have passed through the movable upper lid member 332 matches the number of winning prizes, so that it is possible to easily measure the timing at which the player stops the release of the game ball.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the second sensor S2 is disposed at the left end portion of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 29), so the upper surface rolls along the inclination of the upper surface of the movable upper lid member 332, and the left The game ball flowing down with a velocity component toward the direction can be made easier to move toward the second sensor S2 than the game ball falling without riding on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 (third). It can be made easier to flow down on the route D3). That is, in the jackpot game, the game ball that has reached the moving upper cover member 332 at the first interval time Int1 between rounds is second compared to the game ball that has reached the front side of the moving upper cover member 332 during the round game R. It becomes easy to go to the sensor S2.

  Accordingly, if the game ball is continuously fired during the first interval time Int1 between rounds, it is easier for the game ball to pass through the second sensor S2, and it is easier for the game ball to pass through the V winning sensor VC. Thereby, in order to obtain the benefit of passing the game ball through the V winning sensor VC, the player is prevented from stopping during the interval (that is, stopping the launch at the first interval time Int1 between rounds). be able to.

  With reference to FIG. 33, the correspondence between the first hit type counter C4 in the third embodiment and the big hit type in the special symbol will be described. FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C4 and the big hit type in the special symbol in the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14B) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored. The determination value is defined in association with each jackpot type and the type of winning a prize that became a special symbol lottery opportunity. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C4 is selected.

  Part of the jackpot type defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C4 in the case of a big win in the lottery of special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the second winning opening 640) Since this is the same as that described in the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted, and the jackpot type newly defined in the present embodiment will be described below.

  Specifically, if the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first winning port 64) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 19”. Is defined in association with jackpot D (see 202b21 in FIG. 33).

  When the jackpot D is reached, a ten-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 3360. In this case, the player can receive about 1500 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is “20 to 49”, the big hit E is associated and defined (see 202b22 in FIG. 33).

  When the jackpot E is reached, a six-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 3360. In this case, the player can receive about 900 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is “50 to 99”, the big hit F is associated and defined (see 202b23 in FIG. 33).

  When the jackpot F is reached, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 3360. In this case, the player can receive about 600 prize balls.

  As described above, when the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first winning port 64) is a big win, the difference in the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds. As the number increases, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases and the time required for the jackpot game also increases.

  The jackpot based on the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first winning slot 64) can win 10 rounds with a 20% probability, but it has a 50% chance to win 4 rounds. Basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time compared to the 15-round jackpot game, so that it is possible to start launching a ball for the subsequent jackpot acquisition early.

  According to the present embodiment, in the big win based on the lottery of the special symbol 1, the round game R of the first round is always executed with the first operation pattern. A game ball can enter the VC. Therefore, regardless of the value of the first hit type counter C4, it is possible to easily change the game state after the big hit game to the special symbol probability changing state.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second winning port 640) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 is within the range of “0 to 79”. d is defined in association with it (see 202b24 in FIG. 33).

  When the jackpot d is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 3360. In this case, the player can receive about 2250 prize balls (maximum payout).

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is “80 to 89”, as described above in the first embodiment, the big hit b is associated and defined (see 202b5 in FIG. 14B).

  When the jackpot b is reached, a 10-round jackpot game is executed. In this case, the player can receive about 1500 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is “90 to 99”, as described above in the first embodiment, the big hit c is associated and defined (see 202b6 in FIG. 14B).

  When the jackpot c is reached, an eight-round jackpot game is executed. In this case, the player can receive about 1200 prize balls.

  As described above, the jackpot generated in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second winning port 640) is a jackpot d (maximum payout and 1 in the first operation pattern) with a probability of 80%. The big game where the round game R of the round is executed). Therefore, compared with the number of payouts expected in the case of winning a special symbol 1 lottery, the number of payouts expected in the case of winning a special symbol 2 lottery can be increased.

  On the other hand, the jackpot b or jackpot c is 20% of the probability, and in this case, the movable upper lid member 332 is closed when the scheduled closing operation time Ta (see FIG. 32) elapses from the start of the first round game R. Therefore, the timing at which the game ball passes S2 is delayed, and there is a risk that the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a low probability state of the special symbol.

  For this reason, the profit obtained by the player greatly changes depending on whether the jackpot is d, the jackpot b, or the jackpot c. Therefore, the attention to which jackpot is selected in the lottery of the special symbol 2 is improved. Can improve the interest of the player.

  As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when hitting the normal symbol is reached. It is set to be long (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second winning opening 640, the special symbol 2 is easily drawn. Therefore, once the transition to the probable change state of the special symbol can be made, the special symbol prone change state is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol, and when the big win is likely to become a big hit a (the biggest hit of big ball). Since it becomes easy, it becomes easy for a player to acquire a lot of prize balls. Thus, the game can be performed while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to this embodiment, the path of the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a can be switched by the movable effect member 3360 that is interlocked with the moving upper lid member 332. In this case, it is possible to switch whether or not the game ball passes through the V winning sensor VC arranged downstream of the specific winning opening 65a by the movable effect member 3360.

  The movable effect member 3360 stops the game ball in the tilted state. In this case, the load applied from the game ball to the movable effect member 3360 is directed to maintain the tilted state of the movable effect member 3360. On the other hand, when the movable effect member 3360 intentionally changes state, the movable effect member 3360 moves in a direction away from the game ball. In this case, it is possible to reduce a load necessary for maintaining the movable effect member 3360 in the tilted state, and it is also possible to reduce a load necessary when the state of the movable effect member 3360 is intentionally changed.

  According to the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball passes through the second sensor S2 disposed inside the specific winning opening 65a can be limited after the scheduled closing operation time Ta has elapsed since the start of the round game R. In this case, the V probability variation attacker can be easily configured without performing unnatural operation control for opening the moving upper lid member 332, which is the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a, for a short time.

  According to the present embodiment, when the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the manner in which the game ball is launched into the specific winning opening 65a, the game ball is placed in an appropriate manner (for example, left-handed or right-handed). A notification that prompts the user to launch is issued. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. Here, when the profit obtained by the player changes, for example, a case where whether or not a chance of winning a prize to the V prize sensor VC can be changed is exemplified.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment and the third embodiment, the case where the movable upper lid member 332 and the movable effect members 2360 and 3360 are always interlocked has been described. However, the panel surface lower unit 4300 in the fourth embodiment operates the movable upper lid member 4332. On the other hand, the case where the movable effect member 4360 is interlocked and the case where the posture is maintained without being operated are configured to be switchable. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the line of sight as viewed from below the variable prize device 4330 in the fourth embodiment. In the variable winning device 4330, in comparison with the second embodiment and the third embodiment, the second sensor S2 is overlapped at the same position as the V winning sensor VC (on the back side of the extended floor portion 2331e) and on both the left and right sides. It differs mainly in that it is arranged, the shape of the moving upper lid member 4332 is different, the switching device 4400 is provided, and the shape of the movable effect member 4360 is matched to the switching device 4400. First, the shape of the moving upper lid member 4332 will be described.

  FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the moving upper lid member 4332 as viewed from below, FIG. 36 (a) is a front view of the moving upper lid member 4332, and FIG. 36 (b) is an illustration of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the movement upper cover member 4332 in the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line | wire. In FIG. 36A, in order to facilitate understanding, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the main body plate portion 321 and the light irradiation device 311b are arranged in the assembled state (see FIG. 1). The outline is illustrated with imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, in addition to the configuration of the moving upper cover member 332 described above in the second and third embodiments, the moving upper cover member 4332 is a pair of left and right protrusions protruding downward from the plate-like portion 332a1. The first projecting portion 4332e and a pair of left and right second projecting portions 4332f projecting downward from the plate-like portion 332a1 on the rear and left and right outside of the first projecting portion 4332e.

  In FIG. 35 and FIG. 36B, the reference line RefL is illustrated. The reference line RefL is indicated by an imaginary line as a straight line indicating the position of the plane including the front surface of the second sensor S2 when the movable upper lid member 4332 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 22). That is, in the retracted state of the moving upper lid member 4332, the first protruding portion 4332e of the moving upper lid member 4332 is disposed on the front side of the plane including the front surface of the second sensor S2, while the second protruding portion 4332f is the second sensor. It is arranged behind the plane including the front surface of S2. On the other hand, when the movable upper lid member 4332 is in the extended state (see FIG. 25), the second projecting portion 4332f is disposed on the front side of the plane including the front surface of the second sensor S2 beyond the second sensor S2. .

  The first projecting portion 4332e is a portion projecting left and right outward from the vicinity of the left and right end portions of the light irradiation device 311b in the assembled state, and the lower surface is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined upward and laterally outward, The front-side end surface is formed as an inclined surface that rises and is inclined toward the front side and smoothly connects to the plate-like portion 332a1. Therefore, even if the game ball collided with the first projecting portion 4332e collides with the front side end surface, it is suppressed from bouncing back to the front side, and bounces outward in the left-right direction.

  In addition, the formation location of the 1st protrusion part 4332e is selectively concentrated on the location where a game ball falls. In other words, the game ball is not formed in a place where it is difficult for the ball to rebound. Thereby, the material cost by adding the 1st protrusion part 4332e can be suppressed to the minimum.

  The second projecting portion 4332f is a portion projecting left and right outward from the vicinity of the left and right end portions of the light irradiation device 311b in the assembled state, and the lower surface is formed as an inclined surface that rises and tilts inward to the left and right. The front-side end surface is formed as an inclined surface that rises and is inclined toward the front side and smoothly connects to the plate-like portion 332a1. Therefore, even if the game ball collided with the second projecting portion 4332f collides with the front-side end surface, it is suppressed from bouncing back to the front side and bounces in the left-right inner direction.

  Note that the inclination angle of the second projecting portion 4332f in the left-right direction is set to be larger than the inclination angle of the plate-like portion 332a1. Therefore, compared with the case where the game ball collides with the lower surface of the plate-shaped portion 332a1, the case where the game ball collides with the lower surface of the second projecting portion 4332f makes it easier to direct the game ball toward the sensor S side. be able to.

  In addition, the formation location of the 2nd protrusion part 4332f is selectively concentrated on the location where a game ball falls. In other words, the game ball is not formed in a place where it is difficult for the ball to rebound. Thereby, the material cost by adding the 2nd protrusion part 4332f can be suppressed to the minimum.

  With reference to FIG. 37 (a) and FIG. 37 (b), the flow-down mode of the game ball dropped on the upper surface of the movable effect member 4360 will be described. FIGS. 37A and 37B are cross-sectional views of the variable winning device 4330 along a line corresponding to the XXI-XXI line in FIG. 37A illustrates the retracted state of the movable upper lid member 4332 and the tilted state of the movable effect member 4360, and FIG. 37B illustrates the extended state of the movable upper cover member 4332 and the standing of the movable effect member 4360. The state is illustrated.

  In FIG. 37 (a), an example of the flow-down state after the game ball that has been rolling on the upper surface of the movable upper lid member 4332 in the overhanging state falls as the movable upper lid member 4332 moves toward the retracted state is shown. Illustrated by an imaginary line, in FIG. 37 (b), when the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the overhanging moving upper lid member 4332, the moving upper lid member 4332 is opened for a short time (0.2 seconds), An example of the flow-down mode of the game ball when the moving upper lid member 4332 is moved to the retracted state and the gaming ball falls and the moving upper lid member 4332 is closed immediately after that is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b), after the game ball jumps on the upper surface of the movable effect member 4360, at least a part of the game ball is arranged above the lower bottom surface of the deformed through hole 331a. The arrangement and the material (mainly the coefficient of restitution) of the movable effect member 4360 are set so as to be able to collide with the first projecting portion 4332e or the second projecting portion 4332f.

  Thereby, since the motion of the game ball dropped from the moving upper lid member 4332 can be made intense, the attention to the game ball can be improved.

  In addition, the time required for the game ball to pass through the sensor S or the second sensor S2 after the game ball has dropped from the moving upper lid member 4332 can be increased as compared with the case where the game ball flows down without rebounding. In other words, so-called over-winning can be easily generated.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), when the game ball bounced by the movable effect member 4360 collides with the movement upper lid member 4332 when the movement upper lid member 4332 is maintained in the retracted state, the game ball is the first protruding portion. Collide with 4332e. Therefore, the game ball is given a load along the arrow OD indicating the left and right outer side and the downward direction, and rebounds to the left and right outer side and the downward direction.

  Therefore, in this case, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 34) passes through the second sensor S2.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (b), as described above, since the time required for the game ball to bounce back and be placed at the highest position is 0.4 seconds, the moving upper lid member 4332 is moved from the retracted state. When returning to the extended state in a short time (0.2 seconds), the movable upper cover member 4332 is in the extended state before the game ball bounced by the movable effect member 4360 collides with the movable upper cover member 4332. In this case, the game ball collides with the second protruding portion 4332f. Therefore, the game ball is given a load along the arrow ID pointing to the left and right inner side and downward, and rebounds to the left and right inner side and downward.

  Therefore, in this case, the possibility that the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 34) passes through the second sensor S2 can be reduced, and the possibility that the game ball can pass through the sensor S can be increased.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the shape of the moving upper lid member 4332 at the location where it collides with the game ball causes the moving upper lid member 4332 to be maintained in the open state (retracted state) and the moving upper lid member 4332 to be opened for a short time. The possibility (ratio) of the game ball passing through the sensor S2 can be changed depending on (for 0.2 seconds).

  The first projecting portion 4332e is disposed on the front side of the point where the game ball that bounces by colliding with the movable effect member 4360 collides with the movable upper lid member 4332 in the extended state (see FIG. 37B). . That is, when the moving upper lid member 4332 is opened for a short time (0.2 seconds), the game ball that has fallen from the moving upper lid member 4332 and collided with the movable effect member 4360 jumps before colliding with the movable upper lid member 4332. The moving upper lid member 4332 is in an overhanging state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the first projecting portion 4332e of the moving upper lid member 4332.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a switching device 4400 added in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the switching device 4400. In the following description of the present embodiment, the mechanism for driving the movable effect member 4360 is the same as the first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350 (see FIGS. 18 and 19) described in the second embodiment. Since there is, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the switching device 4400 is coupled to the front side of the main body front portion 2331F (see FIG. 18) below the transmission portion 2364 (see FIG. 18) disposed at the right end position of the movable effect member 4360. A device disposed inside the side wall F4a and the bottom wall F4b, and a rotation member 4410 that is rotatably supported and a posture that maintains the posture of the rotation member 4410 by engaging with the rotation member 4410. It mainly includes a maintenance member 4420 and a vertically moving member 4430 that is supported above the rotating member 4410 so as to be vertically movable and that is lifted by being pushed up by the rotating member 4410.

  The rotating member 4410 extends in the axial radial direction so as to be flush with the end surface on the side wall F4a side of the main body portion 4411 and the main body portion 4411 having a rotationally symmetrical shape rotatably supported by a cylindrical rod fixed to the side wall F4a. It mainly includes a pair of extended portions 4412 and a load generating portion 4413 extending in a columnar shape from the extended end of the extended portion 4412 to the side wall F4a.

  On the peripheral surface of the main body portion 4411, an equally-divided recessed portion 4411 a that is recessed in the same shape periodically (in the present embodiment, at a cycle of 90 degrees) is formed. The equally recessed portion 4411 a has a shape that matches the shape of the distal end portion of the posture maintaining member 4420. In this embodiment, the tip of the posture maintaining member 4420 has a semicircular shape, so that the equally-divided recessed portion 4411a has a semicircular shape that overlaps with the semicircle of the tip of the posture maintaining member 4420.

  The pair of extending portions 4412 and the pair of load generating portions 4413 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the rotational axis of the rotating member 4410. In other words, the pair of load generation units 4413 move along the same locus as the rotation member 4410 rotates.

  The posture maintaining member 4420 is urged in the upward direction (rising direction) by the urging force of the coil spring SP4a, and has a long plate-like main body portion 4421 rotatably supported on the bottom wall F4b, and the main body portion 4421. And an engaging portion 4422 that projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotating member 4410 at the end of the rotating tip.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in the posture maintaining member 4420, the engaging portion 4422 is pressed against the equally recessed portion 4411a of the rotating member 4410 by the urging force of the coil spring SP4a. At this time, the movement trajectory of the most overhanging portion (intermediate portion of the circumference) of the engaging portion 4422 is configured to overlap with the circular orbit passing through the rotating shaft of the rotating member 4410 with the rotating shaft of the main body portion 4421 as the center. The Accordingly, in the state shown in FIG. 38, the urging force of the coil spring SP4a does not apply a load in the rotational direction to the rotating member 4410.

  In this case, in a posture in which the equally recessed portion 4411a is fitted to the engaging portion 4422 (see FIG. 38, the same can be fitted with a phase shift of 90 degrees), the rotary member 4410 is likely to be displaced in the rotational direction due to vibration or the like. Even if it becomes, since the engaging part 4422 produces the resistance of an attitude | position shift | offset | difference, the attitude | position of the rotating member 4410 is maintained. That is, in principle, the posture of the rotating member 4410 is maintained in the state shown in FIG.

  The vertically moving member 4430 is a member whose movement direction is vertically restricted by a pair of plate-like guide portions F4c formed inside the side wall F4a, and is a plate-like portion extending in the front-rear direction, and is moved downward by the coil spring SP4b. A main body portion 4431 to be urged, a supported portion 4432 extending in a plate shape upward from the front end portion of the main body portion 4431, and a member extending from the extending front end of the supported portion 4432 to the back side. A stop 4433 is mainly provided.

  The main body portion 4431 is arranged at a position overlapping with the load generation portion 4413 in a top view, and the load generation portion 4413 receives a load from the load generation portion 4413 and moves up as the load generation portion 4413 moves in a direction approaching the main body portion 4431.

  The main body portion 4431 includes a recessed portion 4431a that is recessed upward from the lower surface side in front of the shaft of the rotating member 4410 in the assembled state.

  The recessed portion 4431a is recessed with a front-rear width that allows the load generating portion 4413 of the rotating member 4410 to enter. With the recessed portion 4431a, the vertical line is used as a reference when the load generating portion 4413 of the rotating member 4410 contacts the main body portion 4431 behind the rotation axis and when the load generation portion 4413 contacts the main body portion 4431 ahead of the rotation axis. When the absolute value of the rotation angle of the rotation member 4410 is the same, the vertical position of the vertical movement member 4430 can be changed. As a result, a function of maintaining the posture of the movable effect member 4360 is added to the vertical movement member 4430, which will be described in detail later.

  The supported portion 4432 includes a covered portion 4432a that protrudes in the front-rear direction so as to cover the pair of guide portions F4c. When the vertically moving member 4430 is pushed downward by the urging force of the coil spring SP4b, the lower limit of the arrangement is a position where the covering portion 4432a and the guide portion F4c abut on each other.

  That is, in this embodiment, when the vertical movement member 4430 is not in contact with the load generation unit 4413, it is maintained at a position (lower limit position) where the covered portion 4432a and the guide unit F4c are in contact, while the load generation unit 4413. By being pushed up, it is configured to be able to ascend to the position (upper limit position) of the vertically moving member 4430 when the load generating portion 4413 is disposed directly above the rotation shaft.

  The locking portion 4433 includes a protruding claw portion 4433a that protrudes downward from the rear end portion on the back side. The projecting claw portion 4433a is provided for the purpose of maintaining the posture of the movable effect member 4360 in an upright state, which will be described in detail later.

  Next, the operation of the switching device 4400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39 (a) to 39 (c) and FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) schematically illustrate operations of the switching device 4400, the first transmission member 2340, the second transmission member 2350, and the movable effect member 4360. 4 is a schematic side view of the switching device 4400, the first transmission member 2340, the second transmission member 2350, and the movable effect member 4360 shown in FIG.

  39 (a) to 39 (c) and FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) illustrate the state in which the rotating member 4410 rotates halfway in the forward rotation direction in time series. 39 (a) and 40 (c) show a state in which the pair of load generating portions 4413 of the rotating member 4410 are arranged side by side, and in FIGS. 39 (c) and 40 (a). The state in which the pair of load generating portions 4413 of the rotating member 4410 are arranged side by side is illustrated.

  In this embodiment, the sliding portion 4363 of the movable effect member 4360 is slightly changed in shape from the sliding portion 2363 so as not to interfere with the extended rod-like portion 2353 of the second transmission member 2350. In other words, the portion facing the extended rod-like portion 2353 is cut away in a direction away from the extended rod-like portion 2353.

  In the present embodiment, the engaging claw Na disposed on the first transmission member 2340 and integrally moving up and down is configured to be able to apply a load in the rotational direction to the rotating member 4410. In the present embodiment, the engagement claw Na is extended in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation member 4410 and is configured within the thickness range of the rotation member 4410 (between planes orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation member 4410). In the area to be processed.

  When a load is applied from the bottom to the top, the engagement claw Na operates relative to the first transmission member 2340 and can release the load (load transmission is released), while the top When a load is applied from the bottom to the bottom, the relative operation with respect to the first transmission member 2340 is disabled, and the load is transmitted to the first transmission member 2340 so as to be pivotally supported.

  More specifically, a projection that prevents the engagement claw Na from tilting is projected from the side of the first transmission member 2340 below the engagement claw Na. Thereby, the engagement claw Na is restricted from being displaced in the tilting direction from the horizontal posture, and is allowed to be displaced in the rising direction.

  That is, the engaging claw Na can apply a load toward the rotating member 4410 when moving in the direction of lifting the rotating member 4410, while the rotating member 4410 when moving in the direction of pushing down the rotating member 4410. Can't be loaded.

  Therefore, when the first transmission member 2340 moves up (when the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) is driven (excited)), the rotating member 4410 is rotated (FIGS. 39A to 39C). On the other hand, when the first transmission member 2340 is lowered (when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 2333 is released), the posture of the rotating member 4410 is maintained (FIG. 39C). And FIG. 40 (a)).

  The projecting claw portion 4433a has a shape that maintains the movable effect member 4360 in an upright state when the vertically moving member 4430 is disposed at the lower limit position when the movable effect member 4360 is in the upright state (see FIG. 39A). Designed. That is, the projecting claw portion 4433a is configured such that the lower surface in contact with the locked portion 4367 is an inclined surface parallel to the inclination of the upper surface of the locked portion 4367 in a standing state of the movable effect member 4360 described later.

  In addition to the configuration of the movable effect member 2360 in the second embodiment, the movable effect member 4360 includes an engaging recessed portion 4366 that is recessed from the front side surface of the transmission portion 2364 toward the back side, and the engaging recess. And a locked portion 4367 extending upward from the lower end portion of the transmission portion 2364 so as to close the lower end portion of the installation portion 4366.

  The locking recessed portion 4366 is recessed so as not to overlap the movement locus of the up and down moving member 4430. That is, the vertical moving member 4430 can be moved up and down without changing the state of the movable effect member 4360 (while standing).

  The locked portion 4367 is inclined in such a manner that the upper surface in contact with the projecting claw portion 4433a becomes closer to the rotation axis as it goes counterclockwise in the left side view (direction view in FIG. 39A). It is formed as a portion having an inclined surface. Therefore, if the protruding claw portion 4433a of the vertically moving member 4430 is caught by the locked portion 4367 even slightly, a movable effect is caused by a load applied to the movable effect member 4360 from the vertically moving member 4430 via the locked portion 4367. The member 4360 can be rotated in the reverse direction.

  In the present embodiment, since the urging force of the coil spring SP4b is sufficiently large, it is possible to prevent the vertical movement member 4430 from rising due to the load from the movable effect member 4360.

  The effect | action which the switching apparatus 4400 provided with the structure mentioned above exerts on the movable effect member 4360 is demonstrated. FIG. 39A shows a state in which the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) is released, the moving upper lid member 4332 is in a closed state (an overhanging state), and the second transmission member 2350 The movable effect member 4360 is raised by the load, and the vertical movement member 4430 is disposed at the lower limit position.

  In this case, the movable effect member 4360 is maintained in a double posture from the second transmission member 2350 and the vertical movement member 4430. That is, only one of the second transmission member 2350 and the up-and-down moving member 4430 is retracted, the movable effect member 4360 is not changed in posture, and only when the both are retracted can be rotated toward the tilted state.

  When the solenoid 2333 is driven (excited) from the state of FIG. 39 (a), the state changes toward the state shown in FIG. 39 (b). In FIG. 39 (b), the first transmission member 2340 is positioned after the solenoid 2333 is driven (excited) and the upper limit position as the movement end of the up-and-down movement, and after the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 2333 is released. The state arrange | positioned in the intermediate position with the lower limit position arrange | positioned is shown in figure.

  In FIG. 39 (b), the load from the engaging claw Na is transmitted to the posture maintaining member 4420 through the rotating member 4410. That is, as the rotating member 4410 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the contact position between the rotating member 4410 and the posture maintaining member 4420 rotates, and the engaging portion 4422 of the posture maintaining member 4420 is attached to the coil spring SP4a. It is pushed down in the opposite direction of the power. Then, when the posture maintaining member 4420 is pushed out of the movement locus of the main body 4411 of the rotating member 4410, the rotating member 4410 can rotate.

  In FIG. 39 (b), the extended rod-like portion 2353 of the second transmission member 2350 is retracted above the transmission portion 2364 of the movable effect member 4360, while the vertical movement member 4430 is maintained at the lower limit position. The attitude change of the movable effect member 4360 is prevented by being locked. Therefore, the posture of the movable effect member 4360 is maintained in the standing state. On the other hand, the moving upper lid member 4332 starts to move toward the open state (retracted state).

  When the first transmission member 2340 is further raised from the state shown in FIG. 39B, the rotating member 4410 rotates in the forward rotation direction, and the equally recessed portion 4411a facing forward in FIG. Move to the side. In this case, the equally recessed portion 4411a and the engaging portion 4422 of the posture maintaining member 4420 are arranged to be opposed to each other, and the posture of the rotating member 4410 is maintained.

  In the state shown in FIG. 39 (c), the vertical movement member 4430 is pushed up by the load generation unit 4413. As a result, the engagement between the protruding claw portion 4433a of the vertically moving member 4430 and the locked portion 4367 of the movable effect member 4360 is released, and the movable effect member 4360 rotates toward the tilted state.

  In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 39C (the state in which the vertical movement member 4430 is disposed at the upper limit position of the vertical movement), the projecting claw portion 4433a of the vertical movement member 4430 is the movable effect member for the first time. It is arranged outside the movement locus of the locked portion 4367 of 4360. Therefore, the movable effect member 4360 starts the tilting operation after the up-and-down moving member 4430 is in the state shown in FIG.

  As described above, in this embodiment, after the movable upper lid member 4332 starts moving toward the open state (retracted state), the movable effect member 4360 starts rotating from the standing state toward the tilted state. That is, when the moving upper lid member 4332 starts to move toward the open state (retracted state), the movable effect member 4360 is maintained in the standing state.

  FIG. 40A shows a state where the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 is released from the state shown in FIG. 39C and the first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350 are lowered. As described above, the engaging claw Na does not rotate the rotation member 4410 in the process in which the first transmission member 2340 is lowered.

  Therefore, in FIG. 40A, while the rotating member 4410 maintains the same posture as FIG. 39C, the movable effect member 4360 is pushed down by the second transmission member 2350, and the state is changed to the standing state.

  When the solenoid 2333 is driven (excited) from the state of FIG. 40A, the state changes toward the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 40 (b), the first transmission member 2340 is positioned after the solenoid 2333 is driven (excited) and the upper limit position as the movement end of the vertical movement, and after the solenoid 2333 is released from driving (excited). A state where the movable effect member 4360 is prevented from tilting at the distal end portion of the extending rod-like portion 2353 is shown in the middle of the lower limit position where the lower end position is placed.

  As shown in FIG. 40B, when the first transmission member 2340 moves up, the second transmission member 2350 moves in a direction away from the movable effect member 4360, while the vertical position of the load generating unit 4413 follows the circular locus. By moving down, the vertically moving member 4430 descends and approaches the locked portion 4367 of the movable effect member 4360.

  Here, since the recessed portion 4431a is formed in the up and down moving member 4430, a first rotation angle that is an angle formed by a line connecting the rotation axis of the upper load generation unit 4413 and the rotation member 4410 and a vertical line is set. Even in the same case, when the load generating unit 4413 is in front of the rotating shaft compared to the case in which the load generating unit 4413 is behind the rotating shaft (see FIG. 39B) (FIG. 40B). In the case of reference), the vertical position of the vertical movement member 4430 is lowered.

  That is, in the process from FIG. 39A to FIG. 39C, the engagement between the locking portion 4433 and the locked portion 4367 is released (the locking portion 4433 deviates from the movement locus of the locked portion 4367). Even if the rotation member 4410 is moved in the process of FIGS. 40A to 40C to the posture of the first rotation angle in the case where the rotation member 4410 is placed in the vertical position, the vertical movement member 4430 is equivalent to the concave portion 4431a. Is lowered, the locking portion 4433 approaches the locked portion 4367.

  In this embodiment, the recessed depth of the recessed portion 4431a is a depth that allows the locking portion 4433 to enter the inside of the movement locus of the locked portion 4367 by the downward movement of the up and down moving member 4430. The elastic modulus of SP4b is that the locking portion 4433 is locked to the locked portion while the locked portion 4367 is disposed in front of the locking portion 4433 between FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (b). Each size is set to a size necessary to generate a force necessary to enter the inside of the movement locus of 4367.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 40B, even when the second transmission member 2350 moves away from the movable effect member 4360 and the movable effect member 4360 is about to tilt, the vertical movement member 4430 is lowered. In the process, the engaging portion 4433 of the up-and-down moving member 4430 is hooked on the locked portion 4367 and a load is applied, so that the movable effect member 4360 stands up due to the influence of the inclination of the locking portion 4433 and the locked portion 4367. (See FIG. 40C).

  When the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 is released from the state shown in FIG. 40C, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. That is, assuming that the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) twice, one set of operations from FIG. 39A to FIG. 39C and FIG. 40A to FIG. 40C is repeated. Will be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the relationship between the operation by excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 and the operation of the movable upper cover member 4332 and the movable effect member 4360 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to a timing chart. In the description of FIG. 41, FIGS. 39 and 40 are referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating changes in time and position of the moving upper lid member 4332, the solenoid 2333, and the movable effect member 4360 in the present embodiment. In FIG. 41, each time point t1 to t8 described in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the state of the movable upper cover member 4332 and the movable effect member 4360 changes as the solenoid 2333 is switched between excitation and non-excitation, but a time difference occurs as described above. Hereinafter, it demonstrates in order.

  When the solenoid 2333 starts to be excited (driven) at the first time point t1, the first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350 start the ascending operation, while being engaged with the vertical movement member 4430, the movable effect member 4360 is maintained in an upright state (see FIG. 39B).

  The maintenance of the standing state of the movable effect member 4360 is released after the vertically moving member 4430 is disposed at the upper limit position of the vertically moving operation as described above. Here, assuming that the timing at which the vertically moving member 4430 is disposed at the upper limit position is substantially the same as the timing at which the first transmission member 2340 is disposed at the upper end position after the excitation of the solenoid 2333, the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw Immediately after the fourth time point t4 when the part 2333c (see FIGS. 18 and 19) reaches the upper end, the movable effect member 4360 starts to tilt toward the tilted state.

  Even when the above assumption is not made, the timing at which the vertically moving member 4430 is disposed at the upper limit position is at least the state shown in FIG. 39B (the saddle member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are disposed at the intermediate position of the moving range). It is apparent that the movable effect member 4360 starts to tilt at least after the movable upper lid member 4332 starts moving toward the open state.

  That is, the movable effect member 4360 operates in response to the operation of the moving upper cover member 4332, but starts the operation after the moving upper cover member 4332 starts the operation. In other words, the movable effect member 4360 starts operation at a timing later by a predetermined period with reference to the timing at which the movable upper cover member 4332 starts operating.

  Note that the operation modes of the movable upper cover member 4332 and the movable effect member 4360 when the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 is released are the same as those described in the above embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted (FIG. )reference).

  As is clear from the description with reference to FIG. 41 again, the movable effect member 4360 and the moving upper cover member 4332 are linked with the operation by excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333, but the operation timing of the movable effect member 4360 and the movable upper cover member 4332 is There is a time difference, not at the same time.

  And the above-mentioned time difference delays the operation start timing of the movable effect member 4360 with respect to the operation start timing of the movable upper lid member 4332 as shown in FIG.

  When the player can visually recognize the operation modes of the movable upper cover member 4332 and the movable effect member 4360 through the front plate member 2320, the player directly enters the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 15). Timing at which the movable upper cover member 4332 changes to a retracted state (a state in which game balls are allowed to enter), which acts as a switch (switches whether to allow or restrict the entry of game balls in the retracted state or the extended state) The movable effect member 4360 changes to a tilted state at a later timing.

  Therefore, compared to the case where only the moving upper cover member 4332 is visually recognized by the player, the game can be performed so that the game ball is fired at a timing after the movable effect member 4360 changes to the tilted state. It is possible to prevent the player from firing a game ball before the member 4332 is in an open state (retracted state) and causing a ball loss for the player.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, by visually recognizing the switching of the state of the movable effect member 4360, the state of the movable upper lid member 4332 can be grasped without directly viewing the movable upper lid member 4332. Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the movable upper lid member 4332 as compared with the case where only the movable upper lid member 4332 operates.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, there is one that performs a notification such as “Aim at the attacker” with a liquid crystal display or voice, etc. in accordance with the timing at which a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65 a, In general, the time interval between the notification timing and the timing at which a game ball can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a varies as the model changes. For this reason, when the timing from the notification until the game ball can actually enter the specific prize opening 65a is long, the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific prize opening 65a even though the game ball is fired according to the notification However, the specific winning opening 65a does not change to a state that allows a game ball to enter, so that the game ball may pass without being able to enter the specific winning opening 65a. It was.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, by confirming the timing at which the movable effect member 4360 starts to move toward the tilted state, the player is not indirect notification such as a liquid crystal effect or voice, but the moving upper cover member 4332. As a direct notification of the movement of the member that is interlocked with the above movement with a certain time lag, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the moving upper lid member 4332 starts operating before the moving upper lid member 4332 starts operating. Therefore, the player can start launching the game ball toward the specific winning port 65a without hesitation with certainty of the timing at which the specific winning port 65a allows the game ball to enter.

  In addition, by grasping the timing at which the moving upper lid member 4332 starts operating before the moving upper lid member 4332 starts to operate, the game ball is compared with the case where the game ball is launched after confirming the operation of the moving upper lid member 4332. The timing of launching can be advanced. Thereby, it is possible to shorten the period from when the moving upper lid member 4332 actually changes to a state allowing the game ball to pass until the game ball passes through the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being extended.

  An example of a game that can be realized using the configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating changes in the outputs of the moving upper lid member 4332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 4360, the sensor S, the second sensor S2, the regulating valve VB, and the V winning sensor VC in the second operation pattern. . In the drawings of the sensor S, the second sensor S2, and the V winning sensor VC, an ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball is detected. Further, the specified number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a indicates the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the second sensor S2.

  In FIG. 42, the operations of the movable upper cover member 4332 and the movable effect member 4360 when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) are omitted from the illustration of the above-described shift in the operation start timing, and the operation starts at the same point. It is illustrated as a thing.

  If the MPU 201 (refer to FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts the control of the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure change display (design change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the movable upper lid member 4332 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

  In the case of a predetermined jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 4332 operates based on the second operation pattern. The driving (excitation) mode of the solenoid 2333 is not different between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the moving upper lid member 4332 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). And the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  In other words, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the movable upper cover member 4332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) so that the specific winning opening 65a is opened. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to open, and the moving upper lid member 4332 is operated for a long time.

  In the long-time operation of the movable upper lid member 4332, the movable upper lid member 4332 is closed (extended state) when the scheduled closing operation time Ta (five seconds) has elapsed, and after a predetermined time (one second in this embodiment) has elapsed. The moving upper cover member 4332 is again set in the open state (retracted state).

  Note that the scheduled closing operation time Ta is longer than a period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game ball is continuously fired, and a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls. Is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the second operation pattern, the movable effect member 4360 is tilted in the scheduled closing operation time Ta, and the movable effect member 4360 is in the standing state after the scheduled closing operation time Ta has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible for the game ball to get on the extended floor portion 2331e disposed on the front side of the V winning sensor VC only during the scheduled closing operation time Ta.

  In the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the moving upper lid member 4332 is displaced to the closed state (the extended state) and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R is completed. .

  FIG. 42 illustrates an example of a passing state of the game ball detected by the sensor S and the sensor S2 when the game ball is continuously fired by the so-called “left strike” described above. That is, in this embodiment, when the game ball passes the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 29) during the scheduled closing operation time Ta in which the movable effect member 4360 maintains the tilted state, the game ball is detected by the second sensor S2. There is a possibility that other game balls are detected by the sensor S.

  Thus, according to this embodiment, the timing at which the game ball can pass through the second sensor S2 can be limited to the time before the scheduled closing operation time Ta elapses from the start of the round game R.

  Therefore, for example, the timing of entering a game ball into the V winning sensor VC (see FIG. 34) as commonly found in a pachinko machine equipped with a V probability variation attacker is limited by a single drive source (solenoid 2333). can do.

  In the present embodiment, when the V winning sensor VC is arranged downstream of the second sensor S2, the second sensor S2 is arranged in a pair of left and right, so that the player can play the game by so-called "right-handed". Even if the ball continues to be fired, the possibility that the game ball will pass the second sensor S2 and the possibility that it will pass the V winning sensor VC can be kept high.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the player is left-handed or right-handed to the player in the period of the round game R that is controlled so that the game ball can pass through the V winning sensor VC or in the period before the round game R. Notification that prompts the player to continuously release the game ball is executed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, the lamp display device 227, or the like (see FIG. 4). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from missing a chance to win the V winning sensor VC because the player has not launched a game ball.

  When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means causes the solenoid 2333 to hold the moving upper cover member 4332 in the closed state (the extended state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. And the second round game R starts after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the moving upper cover member 4332 is changed from the closed state (extended state) to the open state ( The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open the specific winning opening 65a by being displaced to the retracted state, and the moving upper lid member 4332 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to displace the moving upper lid member 4332 to the closed state (the extended state) to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between the round games R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the movable upper cover member 4332 is in the closed state (the extended state) ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the round game R of the last round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means holds the moving upper cover member 4332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. It is controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  Another example of the game that can be realized by using the configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a change in time of outputs of the moving upper cover member 4332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 4360, the sensor S, the second sensor S2, and the V winning sensor VC in the second example of the second operation pattern. 44 is a diagram showing changes in the outputs of the moving upper lid member 4332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 4360, the sensor S, the second sensor S2, and the V winning sensor VC in another example 2 of the second operation pattern. is there. In the drawings of the sensor S, the second sensor S2, and the V winning sensor VC, an ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball is detected.

  43 and 44, the operations of the moving upper cover member 4332 and the movable effect member 4360 when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) are not shown in FIG. Illustrated as starting operation.

  With reference to FIG. 43, the outline | summary of the another example 1 of a 2nd action | operation pattern is demonstrated. Another example 1 of the second operation pattern is the timing when the movable effect member 4360 is tilted with respect to the operation of the moving upper lid member 4332 (according to the number of times of the movement of the moving upper lid member 4332 compared to the second operation pattern). The timing will change). That is, at the time of the sliding operation toward the opened state (retracted state) of the first moving upper lid member 4332, the movable effect member 4360 maintains the standing state, and toward the opened state (retracted state) of the second movable upper lid member 4332. With the sliding operation, the movable effect member 4360 changes to a tilted state. Hereinafter, an application example of the first example of the second operation pattern will be described in detail.

  If the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines the small bonus in the special symbol determination, the MPU 201 starts the control of the small bonus game (of the type determined) after the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends. . Hereinafter, the operation control of the movable upper lid member 4332 performed when the small hit game is given will be described.

  The small hit game is a gaming state in which the possibility of a game ball entering the specific winning port 65a is extremely low and the payout of the prize ball is not substantially accompanied.

  In the case of a predetermined small hit game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 4332 operates based on the other example 1 of the second operation pattern. In addition, about the part which overlaps description, description may be partially omitted.

  The MPU 201 starts the small hit game when the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends.

  In another example 1 of the second operation pattern, the movable upper lid member 4332 opens and closes twice during the short opening operation time Ts (about 1.8 seconds). In the first short opening time Ts1 in which the open state (retracted state) is maintained for the first time, the movable effect member 4360 is in an upright state, and the closing time Tsc (0.2 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the first short opening time Ts1. After the moving upper lid member 4332 slides toward the open state (retracted state) after a lapse of time, the movable effect member 4360 is maintained for the second short opening time Ts2 in which the movable upper lid member 4332 is maintained in the open state (retracted state). Is in a tilted state.

  Therefore, in the first short opening time Ts1, the game ball cannot get on the extended floor portion 2331e (see FIG. 34) arranged on the front side of the V winning sensor VC, and the first short opening time Ts1 and the closing time For the first time after the elapse of time Tsc, the game ball can get on the extended floor portion 2331e arranged on the front side of the V winning sensor VC.

  In the different example 1, the first short opening time Ts1 is set in 0.5 seconds, and the second short opening time Ts2 is set in 1.0 seconds.

  When the small hit end condition (elapse of the short opening operation time Ts or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment)) is satisfied, the movable upper lid member 4332 is closed (extended state). The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the small hit game ends. It should be noted that since it is impossible for a specified number of game balls to win during the short opening operation time Ts, the small hit game is ended after the short opening operation time Ts (about 1.8 seconds). .

  FIG. 43 shows an example of a passing state of the game ball detected by the sensor S, the second sensor S2, and the V winning sensor VC when the game ball is continuously aimed at the specific winning opening 65a. That is, in this embodiment, as in the above-described embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 34) when the movable effect member 4360 is tilted is the sensor S or the second sensor S2. It is distributed to.

  On the other hand, when the movable effect member 4360 is in the standing state (during the first short opening time Ts1), the game balls that have reached the front side of the specific winning opening 65a flow down exclusively through the path C2a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being detected by the second sensor S2 and the V winning sensor VC during the first short opening time Ts1.

  With reference to FIG. 44, an outline of another example 2 of the second operation pattern will be described. In another example 2 of the second operation pattern, as compared with another example 1 of the second operation pattern, the third short opening time Ts3 (0.2 seconds) is set instead of the second short opening time Ts2. Only thing is different.

  That is, the second opening of the movable upper cover member 4332 that allows the game ball to enter the second sensor S2 only becomes a short opening operation. In this case, even if the game ball falls and collides with the movable effect member 4360 when the movable upper lid member 332 is opened, the game ball is, as described above, the second protruding portion 4332f (see FIG. 35) of the movable upper lid member 4332. ) And bounce back toward the left and right inside (side away from the second sensor S2). Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from passing through the second sensor S2.

  As described above, according to the first and second examples of the second operation pattern, the timing at which the game ball can pass through the second sensor S2 is set again after the elapse of the first short opening time Ts1. Can be limited to the end of the small hit game after the open state (retracted state), and in addition, according to another example 2 of the second operation pattern, the opening operation of the movable upper cover member 4332 is short. By setting the opening operation, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from passing through the second sensor S2. Therefore, depending on whether the moving upper lid member 4332 is operated in the second example of the second operation pattern or the moving upper lid member 4332 is operated in the second example of the second operation pattern, only the solenoid 2333 is used as a driving source. Different profits can be obtained.

  Thus, for example, a V attacker (a so-called “1 type 2 type mixer” in which the V winning sensor VC is set so that a big hit is generated by the passing of the game ball, the attacker having the V winning sensor VC). The control valve VB for preventing erroneous winning in the V prize sensor VC as generally found in a pachinko machine having the above can be omitted, and the drive device for the control valve VB can be dispensed with. That is, by providing the movable effect member 4360 with the function of the restriction valve VB and configuring the game ball that has passed the second sensor S2 to substantially pass the V winning sensor VC, the drive device for the restriction valve VB is omitted. Therefore, the arrangement space of the drive device and the member cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the movable effect member 4360 starts to tilt is set later than the movement start timing of the moving upper lid member 4332 (see FIG. 41), so that the solenoid 2333 is activated at the third short opening time Ts3. When excited (driven), the movable effect member 4360 can be controlled to return to the standing state before the movable effect member 4360 is tilted. In this case, the movable effect member 4360 can be maintained substantially in an upright state, and the game ball that has passed through the movable upper lid member 4332 can flow down the front side of the movable effect member 4360. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through the moving upper lid member 4332 from passing through the second sensor S2 during the third short opening time Ts3. In this case, the movable rendering member 4360 has the function of the restriction valve VB, and the game ball that has passed the second sensor S2 is configured to substantially pass the V winning sensor VC, thereby omitting the drive device for the restriction valve VB. Therefore, the arrangement space of the drive device and the member cost can be suppressed.

  An example of the control mode in this embodiment will be described. In the example of the control mode described here, the opportunity to win the jackpot is when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, And a case where a game ball passes through a predetermined V winning sensor VC.

  FIG. 45 is a front view of the game board 13. In the game board 13 in the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration described in the first embodiment, a second specific winning port 650a is arranged at the upper part of the board surface. The second specific winning port 650a is a large winning port arranged in place of the specific winning port 65 in the first embodiment. Instead, in the description of FIGS. 45 to 49, the specific winning port 65a is small. Open and close in the hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 45, in this embodiment, a pair of left and right ball monitoring sensors S0 are disposed near the upper end of the specific winning opening 65a. The entrance monitoring sensor S0 is a sensor that can detect the passage of a sphere, and is disposed on the downstream side of the moving upper lid member 4332 (see FIG. 34) and the upstream side of the movable effect member 4360 (see FIG. 34). That is, the movable effect member 4360 is disposed at a position above the moving locus (moving locus of the arcuate track) and below the moving upper lid member 4332.

  In this embodiment, the entrance monitoring sensor S0 is configured to be able to detect at least a part of a sphere that has passed downward on the front side of the moving upper lid member 4332, and is not a sensor used for paying out a prize ball. This is used as a trigger for switching display effects performed by the symbol display device 81. For example, due to the detection of the passing of the ball by the incoming monitoring sensor S0, the third symbol display device 81 performs an effect such as “chance!” Or “ball get” to improve the interest of the player. Configured to do.

  When the jackpot lottery performed due to winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 results in a jackpot lottery, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display is made so that the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the second specific winning opening 650a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won).

  The second specific prize opening 650a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the second specific prize opening 650a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening 650a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done. The control is performed so that 15 prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the second specific prize opening 650a.

  The opening / closing plate that opens and closes the second specific winning port 650a is configured to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and is rotated from the standing state (closed state) in which the second specific winning port 650a is closed, The state can be changed between the tilted state (open state) in which the second specific prize winning opening 650a is opened.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110.

  The ROM 202 in this control example has at least a small hit type selection table 202e in addition to the ROM 202 (see FIG. 14) in the first embodiment. This small hit type selection table 202e is used to select a small hit type when a small hit is made based on a game ball entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. It is.

  The contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a) to 47 (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a.

  In the first per-random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 47A, whether or not the value of the first per-random number counter C3 acquired when the game ball enters the first winning port 64 is a big hit. In order to determine whether the value of the first symbol random number counter C3 acquired when the game ball enters the second winning port 640 and the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining The special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is set.

  Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), a random number value determined to be a win in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first winning port 64. This is a table in which (determination value) is set. In the first special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is “0”, and if it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the first random number counter C3 is “1 to 3”, and if it is “1 to 3”, it is determined that it is a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is “4 to 319”, it is determined that the value is out.

  On the other hand, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), a random number value (determination value) determined to be a win in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning port 640. Is a set table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C3 is “0”, and if it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the obtained first random number counter C3 is “1 to 318”, and if it is “1 to 318”, it is determined that it is a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that it is “319”, it is determined that it is out of place.

  Thus, the first per-random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. In the first per-random number counter C3, when the first special symbol is drawn based on the first winning port 64, the first special symbol is a random number, and the total number of random numbers is 320. Among them, since the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1, the probability of jackpot of the first special symbol is “1/320”. In addition, since the total number of random numbers that will be a small hit is 3, the probability that the first special symbol will be a small hit is “3/320”.

  On the other hand, at the time of lottery of the second special symbol based on the entrance to the second winning opening 640, the random number value that is the big hit of the second special symbol is one, and the total number of random number values is 320, Since the total number of random numbers to be 1 is 1, the probability of winning the second special symbol is “1/320”. In addition, since the total number of random numbers that will be a small hit is 318, the probability that the second special symbol will be a small hit is “318/320”.

  As in the case of the above-described control examples, when it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “○” is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). In addition, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

  The electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds when the time is short, but is opened only for 0.2 seconds when the time is not short. Therefore, even if the value of the second random number counter C5 is won when the time is not short, it is difficult to win the game ball to the second winning port 640. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game that attempts to enter the second winning opening 640 regardless of whether the time is short or not (the jackpot with the short time has not been revealed).

  FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 48) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, as described above. It is stipulated in association with the jackpot type and the type of winning a prize that became a special symbol lottery opportunity. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C4 is selected.

  Specifically, if the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first winning port 64) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 49”. Is defined in association with jackpot G (see 202b41 in FIG. 48).

  When the jackpot is G, 16 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is in a short-time state (100 times) until the special symbol variation is consumed 100 times. In this case, the player can receive about 2400 prize balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is “50 to 99”, the big hit H is associated and defined (see 202b42 in FIG. 48).

  When the jackpot H is reached, a 16-round jackpot game is executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes a normal state. In this case, the player can receive about 2400 prize balls, but cannot get a short-time profit after the jackpot game ends.

  In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entrance to the first winning port 64), the game state after the end of the jackpot game can be set to the short-time state with a probability of 50%. During the short time, we will aim to win even more jackpots through the small hit game described below.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second winning port 640) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 99” (all ranges). Is defined in association with the above jackpot G (see 202b43 in FIG. 48).

  That is, 16 rounds of jackpot game are executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is in a short time state (100 times) until the special symbol variation is consumed 100 times. In this case, the player can receive about 2400 prize balls.

  As described above, the jackpot generated in the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second winning port 640) is the jackpot G (100 jackpots in a short time) with a probability of 100%. Therefore, as compared with the case where the special symbol 1 is a lottery, the possibility of acquiring the next jackpot in a short time after the jackpot game ends is increased.

  As described above, during the time of special symbol, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when hitting the normal symbol is shortened. It is set to be long (5 seconds or 0.5 seconds). Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second winning opening 640, the special symbol 2 is easily drawn. And, if a special symbol 2 lottery wins, it becomes a short time state after the jackpot ends, and it becomes easier to obtain a big winner by special symbol 2 lottery.

  Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the short-time state, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and if the big win, the special symbol time-short state, which tends to be a big hit G, is likely to be repeated. It becomes easy to acquire a lot of prize balls. Thereby, the game can be performed while strongly expecting the player to shift to the short time state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49A to FIG. 49C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

  The small hitting type selection table 202e is a special symbol 1 small hitting selection table 202e1 for selecting a small hitting type based on the first winning opening 64, and a small hitting based on the second winning opening 640. A special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202e2 for selecting a type (see FIG. 49A).

  As shown in FIG. 49B, at the small hit based on the first winning opening 64, the value of the small hit type counter C6 is selected, and when the value is “0 to 1”, the small hit A (V passable) is selected. In the case of “2 to 99”, the small hit B (V cannot pass) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), at the small hit based on the second winning opening 640, when the value of the first hit type counter C6 is “0-9”, the small hit A (V passing is possible). In the case of “10 to 99”, the small hit B (V cannot pass) is selected.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 43) is set according to the small hit type. Specifically, in the small hit game with the small hit A, the solenoid 2333 is driven in another example 1 (see FIG. 43) of the second operation pattern, and in the small hit game with the small hit B, the second operation pattern In another example 2 (see FIG. 44), the solenoid 2333 is driven.

  That is, the small hit A is a small hit that is given with a high probability that the big hit is made by passing the game ball through the V winning sensor VC (see FIG. 43), and the small hit B is a small hit that is not given the big hit with a high probability. It is a hit.

  Further, in this control example, the jackpot given after the jackpot A is configured to be a jackpot G (short hit jackpot at 16R).

  In the present embodiment, the type of jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of jackpot, but as other specifications, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a case of jackpot Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and the jackpot that has won the right earlier is executed by passing the game ball through the V winning sensor VC in the subsequent jackpot game. It may be. By doing in this way, the player can select a small hit for passing the V winning sensor VC, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball easily flows down when the movable upper lid member 4332 is maintained in the open state (retracted state) and when the movable upper lid member 4332 is opened for a short time (opened for 0.2 seconds). The route is changed. In this case, the possibility (ratio) that the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a is detected by specific sensors (second sensor S2 and V winning sensor VC) may be changed without providing a dedicated driving device. it can.

  In particular, when the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a short time, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a is selectively made difficult to go to the second sensor S2 and the V winning sensor VC. It is possible to easily prevent the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a during the game from passing through the second sensor S2 and the V winning sensor VC.

  In the present embodiment, when the movable upper cover member 4332 is in an open state (retracted state), the movable effect member 4360 can be switched between a tilted state and a standing state without a separate driving device. . In this case, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the effect using the movable effect member 4360 while reducing the product cost.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 53. In the second embodiment and the third embodiment, the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect members 2360 and 3360 are always interlocked, and the movable effect member 2360 is moved in the closed state (the extended state). Although the case where the standing state is achieved has been described, in the panel surface lower unit 5300 according to the fifth embodiment, the movable effect member 2360 changes from the tilted state to the standing state when the movable upper cover member 332 is closed (the extended state). And the case where the movable effect member 2360 maintains the posture while being tilted as the movable upper lid member 332 is in the closed state (the extended state). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 50, a switching device 5400 added in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the switching device 5400 in the fifth embodiment. In the following description of the present embodiment, the mechanism for driving the movable effect member 2360 is the same as the first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350 (see FIGS. 18 and 19) described above in the second embodiment. Since there is, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the switching device 5400 is connected to the front side of the main body front portion 2331F (see FIG. 18) below the transmission portion 2364 (see FIG. 18) disposed at the right end position of the movable effect member 2360. In addition to the rotating member 4410 and the posture maintaining member 4420 described in the fourth embodiment, the apparatus is disposed on the inner side of the side wall F4a and the bottom wall F4b. A lower surface raising member 5440 that changes its posture by being pushed from the load generating portion 4413 of the rotating member 4410 is provided.

  The lower surface raising member 5440 is rotated rearward to the retracted position (see FIG. 51A) by the urging force of the coil spring SP5a, while being extended by the load applied from the load generating unit 4413 (see FIG. 51C). Is a member that can be rotated forward, and is disposed on the front side of the rotation shaft and pressed from the load generating unit 4413, and disposed on the opposite side of the pressed portion 5441 across the rotation shaft. , And a contact portion 5442 that can be brought into contact with the lower surface of the first transmission member 2340 (see FIGS. 18 and 19) in the extended position.

  The lower surface raising member 5440 is disposed on a plane on which the load generating unit 4413 moves, and is loaded by the load generating unit 4413 as the load generating unit 4413 moves in a direction approaching the pressed portion 5441, and the coil spring Pre-rotates against the urging force of SP5a.

  The abutting part 5442 stops at the retracted position at the time of rear rotation by abutting against a restricting part F5d protruding in the left-right direction from the side wall F4a.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the lower surface rising member 5440 is not in contact with the load generating portion 4413, it is maintained at a position (retracted position) where the contact portion 5442 and the regulating portion F5d are in contact with each other, while the load generating portion By being pressed by 4413, the contact portion 5442 is configured to be able to rotate forward to a position (an overhang position) where the contact portion 5442 is disposed directly below the first transmission member 2340 (see FIGS. 18 and 19).

  Next, the operation of the switching device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. 51 (a) to 51 (c) and FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (c) schematically illustrate operations of the switching device 5400, the first transmission member 2340, the second transmission member 2350, and the movable effect member 2360. 4 is a schematic side view of the switching device 5400, the first transmission member 2340, the second transmission member 2350, and the movable effect member 2360 shown in FIG.

  51 (a) to 51 (c) and FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (c) illustrate in time series how the rotating member 4410 rotates halfway in the forward rotation direction. 51A and 52C show a state in which the pair of load generating portions 4413 of the rotating member 4410 are arranged side by side, and in FIGS. 51C and 52A. The state in which the pair of load generating portions 4413 of the rotating member 4410 are arranged side by side is illustrated.

  In the present embodiment, similar to the above-described embodiment, the engaging claw Na that is disposed on the first transmission member 2340 and integrally moves up and down is configured to be able to apply a rotational load to the rotating member 4410. . Similarly to the above-described embodiment, the engaging claw Na can apply a load toward the rotating member 4410 when moving in the direction in which the rotating member 4410 is lifted, while moving in a direction in which the rotating member 4410 is pressed down. The load cannot be applied to the rotating member 4410.

  In the present embodiment, the engagement claw Na is extended in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation member 4410 and is configured within the thickness range of the rotation member 4410 (between planes orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation member 4410). In the area to be processed. Moreover, it arrange | positions below with respect to the 1st transmission member 2340 compared with the engaging claw Na demonstrated in the above-mentioned embodiment.

  When a load is applied from the bottom to the top, the engagement claw Na operates relative to the first transmission member 2340 and can release the load (load transmission is released), while the top When a load is applied from the bottom to the bottom, the relative operation with respect to the first transmission member 2340 is disabled, and the load is transmitted to the first transmission member 2340 so as to be pivotally supported.

  More specifically, a projection that prevents the engagement claw Na from tilting is projected from the side of the first transmission member 2340 below the engagement claw Na. Thereby, the engagement claw Na is restricted from being displaced in the tilting direction from the horizontal posture, and is allowed to be displaced in the rising direction.

  Therefore, when the first transmission member 2340 moves up (when the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) is driven (excited)), the rotating member 4410 is rotated (FIGS. 51A to 51C). On the other hand, when the first transmission member 2340 is lowered (when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 2333 is released), the posture of the rotating member 4410 is maintained (FIG. 51 (c)). And FIG. 52 (a)).

  In the present embodiment, the lower surface raising member 5540 is pressed in the process in which the load generating parts 4413 arranged side by side are arranged side by side by the rotation of the rotating member 4410, toward the extended position. 51 (a) to 51 (c)), while the load generating parts 4413 arranged side by side are arranged side by side to the lower surface raising member 5540. Is released, and the lower surface raising member 5540 is rotated backward toward the retracted position by the urging force of the coil spring SP5a (see FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (c)).

  The effect of the switching device 5400 having the above-described configuration on the movable effect member 2360 will be described. FIG. 51A shows a state in which the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) is released, and the movable upper cover member 332 is closed (extended state). The movable effect member 2360 is raised by the load.

  When the solenoid 2333 is driven (excited) from the state shown in FIG. 51A, the state changes toward the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 51 (b), the first transmission member 2340 is positioned after the solenoid 2333 is driven (excited), and the upper limit position as the movement end of the vertical movement, and after the solenoid 2333 is released from driving (excited). The state arrange | positioned in the position in the middle with the lower limit position arrange | positioned is shown in figure.

  In FIG. 51 (b), the load from the engaging claw Na is transmitted to the posture maintaining member 4420 through the rotating member 4410. That is, as the rotating member 4410 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the contact position between the rotating member 4410 and the posture maintaining member 4420 rotates, and the engaging portion 4422 of the posture maintaining member 4420 is attached to the coil spring SP4a. It is pushed down in the opposite direction of the power. Then, when the posture maintaining member 4420 is pushed out of the movement locus of the main body 4411 of the rotating member 4410, the rotating member 4410 can rotate.

  In FIG. 51 (b), the extending rod-like portion 2353 of the second transmission member 2350 is retracted above the transmission portion 2364 of the movable effect member 2360, so that the movable effect member 2360 is rotated toward the tilted state. Therefore, like the second embodiment, the movable effect member 2360 is tilted before the movable upper lid member 332 is in the open state (retracted state).

  When the first transmission member 2340 is further raised from the state shown in FIG. 51 (b), the rotating member 4410 rotates in the forward rotation direction, and the equally recessed portion 4411a facing forward in FIG. 51 (b) is lowered. Move to the side. In this case, the equally recessed portion 4411a and the engaging portion 4422 of the posture maintaining member 4420 are arranged to be opposed to each other, and the posture of the rotating member 4410 is maintained.

  In the state shown in FIG. 51C, the lower surface raising member 5440 is pressed by the load generating portion 4413 and rotated in the forward direction. Accordingly, the contact portion 5442 is disposed below the first transmission member 2340, and the position of the first transmission member 2340 when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 2333 is released is raised (FIG. 52A). reference).

  FIG. 52A shows a state after the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) is released from the state shown in FIG. 51C. Compared with the state shown in FIG. 51A, which is the same in that the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 is released by being supported by the contact portion 5442 of the lower surface rising member 5440, The vertical position of the transmission member 2340 is the upper side. The posture of the rotating member 4410 shown in FIG. 52A is the same as the posture of the rotating member 4410 shown in FIG.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the contact portion 5442 stops immediately before the second transmission member 2350 interlocked with the supported first transmission member 2340 contacts the tilted movable effect member 2360. It is formed with an appropriate length.

  In other words, the height H51 to the lower surface of the first transmission member 2340 with reference to an appropriate vertical position in a state where the first transmission member 2340 is disposed at the lowest position of the movable range (see FIG. 51A). ) To a height H52 up to the lower surface of the first transmission member 2340 shown in FIG. 52A, it is formed with a length sufficient to change the vertical position of the first transmission member 2340. Thereby, in FIG. 52A, the movable effect member 2360 is maintained in a tilted state.

  Note that the height H52 shown in FIG. 52 (a) is the height when the second transmission member 2350 is disposed at a position immediately before the second transmission member 2350 contacts the tilted movable effect member 2360, and the engagement claw. Na is moved below the rotational axis of the rotating member 4410, and is set as a height at which the lower equally divided recessed portion 4411a can be disposed.

  When the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) is excited (driven) from the state shown in FIG. 52 (a), the state changes toward the state shown in FIG. 52 (b). In FIG. 52 (b), the first transmission member 2340 is positioned after the solenoid 2333 is driven (excited) and the upper limit position as the movement end of the vertical movement, and after the solenoid 2333 is released from driving (excited). The state arrange | positioned in the middle position with the lower limit position arrange | positioned is shown in figure.

  In FIG. 52 (b), the load from the engaging claw Na is transmitted to the posture maintaining member 4420 through the rotating member 4410. That is, as the rotating member 4410 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the contact position between the rotating member 4410 and the posture maintaining member 4420 rotates, and the engaging portion 4422 of the posture maintaining member 4420 is attached to the coil spring SP4a. It is pushed down in the opposite direction of the power. Then, when the posture maintaining member 4420 is pushed out of the movement locus of the main body 4411 of the rotating member 4410, the rotating member 4410 can rotate.

  In FIG. 52 (b), the extended rod-like portion 2353 of the second transmission member 2350 is retracted above the transmission portion 2364 of the movable effect member 2360, so that the movable effect member 2360 maintains the tilted state.

  In addition, in FIG. 52B, the load generating portion 4413 that has been in contact with the pressed portion 5441 of the lower surface rising member 5440 moves in a direction away from the pressed portion 5441, so that the lower surface rising member 5440 is coiled. The spring SP5a is rotated backward by the urging force.

  When the first transmission member 2340 is further raised from the state shown in FIG. 52 (b), the rotating member 4410 rotates in the forward rotation direction, and the equally recessed portion 4411a facing forward in FIG. 52 (b) is lowered. Move to the side. In this case, the equally recessed portion 4411a and the engaging portion 4422 of the posture maintaining member 4420 are arranged to face each other and are fitted as shown in FIG. 52 (c), whereby the posture of the rotating member 4410 is maintained. The

  When the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) is released from the state shown in FIG. 52 (c), the first transmission member 2340 is lowered and shifts to the state shown in FIG. 51 (a). That is, assuming that the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) twice, one set of operations from FIG. 51 (a) to FIG. 51 (c) and FIG. 52 (a) to FIG. 52 (c) is repeated. Will be.

  Thereby, when the movable upper cover member 332 is in the closed state (the extended state), the case where the movable effect member 2360 is maintained in the tilted state and the case where the movable effect member 2360 returns to the standing state are alternately switched. Can do.

  An example of a game that can be realized using the configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing changes in time of the movable upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, and the movable effect member 2360 in the third operation pattern.

  In FIG. 53, the operation of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) is omitted from the illustration of the above-described shift in the operation start timing, and starts operating at the same point. It is illustrated as a thing.

  If the MPU 201 (refer to FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts the control of the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure change display (design change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the movable upper lid member 332 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

  In the case of a predetermined jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the movable upper cover member 332 operates based on the third operation pattern. The driving (excitation) mode of the solenoid 2333 is not different between the first operation pattern and the third operation pattern.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). And the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the movable upper cover member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to thereby open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be opened, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  In the long-time operation of the moving upper cover member 332, the moving upper cover member 332 is closed (extended state) when the scheduled closing operation time Ta (5 seconds) has elapsed, and after a predetermined time (1 second in this embodiment) has elapsed. The moving upper cover member 332 is again opened (retracted).

  In the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced to the closed state (the extended state) and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. .

  As shown in FIG. 53, in this embodiment, even when the movable upper lid member 332 changes between the open state (retracted state) and the closed state (extended state), the movable effect member 2360 is not changed during the round game R. Maintained in a tilted state. Therefore, when the player determines whether to open or close the specific winning opening 65a by looking at the movable effect member 2360, it is possible to easily determine the break of the round game R (between rounds).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, for the player who visually recognizes the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), the difference in the state of the movable effect member 2360 compared to the difference in the state of the movable upper cover member 332. Is easy to determine. Therefore, even when the moving upper lid member 332 that directly relates to the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a opens and closes a plurality of times during the round game R, the state of the movable effect member 2360 is changed in the round game R. By maintaining the operation state of the movable effect member 2360, it is possible to easily determine a break (between rounds) in the round game R.

  As a result, the player visually recognizes that the moving upper lid member 332 is in the closed state (retracted state) during the round game R, and misunderstands that the round game R has ended. The possibility can be reduced.

  In addition, as an example of performing an operation different from the aim based on misunderstanding, for example, in order to reduce the number of dead balls (game balls entering the out port 314 (see FIG. 16)) in the first interval between rounds. In addition, an operation of stopping the launch of the game ball can be performed. When the operation of the moving upper cover member 332 and the operation of the movable effect member 2360 are interlocked each time, the game ball also when the moving upper cover member 332 is closed at a timing that is not a break (between rounds) of the round game R. There is a high possibility of performing an operation to stop the launch of the game ball to stop the launch of the game, and there is a risk that the quick digestion of the jackpot game will be hindered.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, by confirming the state of the movable effect member 2360, it is possible to easily determine the break of the round game R (between rounds), and therefore an operation to stop the launch of the game ball is excessive. Since it can be suppressed, it is possible to quickly digest the jackpot game.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means solenoid 2333 keeps the movable upper cover member 332 in the closed state (the extended state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R starts after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the moving upper cover member 332 is changed from the closed state (extended state) to the open state ( The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be displaced to the retracted state to open the specific winning opening 65a, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (extension state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between each round game R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the movable upper cover member 332 is closed (the extended state) ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the round game R of the last round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means holds the moving upper cover member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. It is controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

<Use for 2-round Paka Paka>
In the present embodiment, control is performed to open and close the movable upper lid member 332 during the round game R, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the moving upper lid member 332 may be controlled to be maintained in the open state (retracted state) during the first operation time T1.

  In this case, the moving upper lid member 332 is in an open state (retracted state) at the start of the first round game R, and then the movable upper lid member 332 is closed (in an extended state) at the end of the second round game R. The movable effect member 2360 is maintained in the standing state until immediately before.

  In this case, for example, if the round game R in the first round and the second round is set to be finished in a short time (for example, 0.2 seconds), the game in the round game R in the first round and the second round The time during which the movable effect member 2360 is maintained in a tilted state while suppressing the number of winning balls to the specific winning opening 65a (substantially to 0) is the time of the round game R in the first and second rounds. And the first interval time Int1 between rounds (0.2 seconds + 2.0 seconds + 0.2 seconds = 2.4 seconds).

  Therefore, it is possible to make it possible for a player who visually recognizes the movable effect member 2360 to win a game ball in the specific winning opening 65a.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, the movable upper cover member 332 can be opened and closed twice before the movable effect member 2360 returns from the tilted state to the standing state. In this case, when the moving upper lid member 332 is controlled to open and close twice in the round game R, the movable effect member 2360 can be prevented from returning to the standing state during the round game R. Thereby, since the break of the round game R (between rounds) can be easily determined, it is possible to easily determine the switching timing of the launch of the game ball, and to quickly digest the jackpot game.

  According to the present embodiment, when the movable upper cover member 332 is subjected to the short opening operation (0.2 second opening operation) a plurality of times (twice), the movable effect is produced over the time including the interval (interval) of the short opening operation. The member 2360 is configured to be maintained in a tilted state. In this case, it can be shown to the player as if the game ball is awarded to the specific winning opening 65a. This makes it possible for the player to fire a game ball even during the short opening operation of the movable upper lid member 332, and thus it is possible to promote the generation of useless balls.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 61. In the second to fifth embodiments, the case where the solenoid 2333 is the only device that generates the driving force for operating the movable effect members 2360, 3360, and 4360 has been described. However, the board surface lower unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment is described below. In addition to the solenoid 2333, a load generating device 500 having a driving motor 510 that generates a driving force for operating the movable effect member 6360 is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 54 is a front exploded perspective view of the panel surface lower unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 55 is a rear exploded perspective view of the panel surface lower unit 6300. As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the board lower unit 6300 includes the front unit 310 and the front plate member 2320 described in the above embodiment, and is slightly different from the movable effect member 2360 described in the above embodiment. A variable winning device 6330 having a movable effect member 6360 having a different shape and a base plate 6060 which is a plate member cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front and constitutes the game board 13 are formed in the front-rear direction. A load generating device 500 disposed in a cavity 6060b formed in the lower portion of the inner rail 61 of the receiving opening 6060a.

  The variable winning device 6330 is arranged in a pair of left and right above the pair of sensors S (see FIG. 56), and is controlled to pay out ten prize balls based on detecting the passing of game balls. A sensor S3 and a restriction plate 6331m that extends from the position between the sensor S and the third sensor S3 to the front side and restricts the passing of the game ball in the vertical direction are provided.

  The restriction plate 6331m is disposed as a lid of the lower passage 331b, and is formed by connecting a pair of left and right extending floor portions 2331e. With the restriction plate 6331m, game balls that flow down the upper surface of the movable effect member 6360 are distributed to the third sensor S3, and game balls that do not flow down the upper surface of the movable effect member 6360 (flow down the lower surface side (front side)) are distributed to the sensor S. It is done.

  The mechanism for operating the movable effect member 6360 by the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) is the first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350 (see FIGS. 18 and 19) described in the second embodiment. ), The description is omitted.

  The load generator 500 includes a drive motor 510 whose lower surface is fixed in the cavity 6060b, a first clutch member 520 configured as a disk through which the drive shaft of the drive motor 510 is inserted, and the first clutch member 520. It mainly includes a second clutch member 530 supported by the base plate 6060 in a manner capable of rotating in conjunction with the first clutch member 520 by being given a load in the rotational direction.

  56 (a) and 56 (b) are partial front views of the game board 13, and FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the movable effect member 6360 and the load generating device 500. In FIG. 56 (a), the positions of the first clutch member 520 and the second clutch member 530 in use are shifted from those in FIG. 56 (b). The state of being arranged at the respective positions is illustrated. Here, the “use state” means a state in which the player can play the game. Further, the base plate 6060 is partially viewed in cross section so that the shaft support portion of the second clutch member 530 can be visually recognized.

  56 (a) and 56 (b), whether or not the movable upper lid member 332 is overhanging is shown by the presence or absence of shading. That is, in FIG. 56 (a) and FIG. 56 (b), the part where the hatching is formed is a part that restricts the passage of the game ball as a part of the front plate member 2320 or the game ball between the front plate member 2320. It means that the portion is close to the front plate member 2320 so as to block the passage of.

  In FIG. 56A, the standing state of the movable effect member 6360 is illustrated, and in FIG. 56B, the tilted state of the movable effect member 6360 is illustrated. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the sensor through which the game ball passes corresponds to the state of the movable effect member 6360. That is, when the movable effect member 6360 is in the standing state, the game ball flows down the front side of the movable effect member 6360 and passes the sensor S (see FIG. 56A), while when the movable effect member 6360 is in the tilted state. The game ball flows down the back side (upper side) of the movable effect member 6360 and passes through the third sensor S3.

  In addition, the fact that the substantial left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a varies depending on the state of the movable effect member 6360 is the same as described in the above embodiments, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The movable effect member 6360 includes the main body plate portion 2361, the support shaft portion 2362, the sliding portion 2363, and the transmission portion 2364 described above in the second embodiment, while the recessed portion 2365 is omitted (not recessed). In addition, an additional portion 6368 is formed in the shape of a fan having the same thickness as the transmission portion 2364 around the support shaft portion 2362 in the clockwise direction of the transmission portion 2364 when viewed from the right.

  The additional portion 6368 is shaved (chamfered) obliquely in the circumferential direction at the protruding portion 6368a that protrudes in the radial direction from the clockwise end in the right view and the right portion of the clockwise end in the right view. A chamfered portion 6368b.

  The chamfered portion 6368b is formed to improve workability when the variable winning device 6330 is assembled to the receiving opening 6060a (see FIG. 54). That is, as described above, the variable prize-winning device 6330 is assembled to the base plate 6060 by being fitted into the receiving opening 6060a from the back. In this embodiment, the load generating device 500 is disposed on the base plate 6060. When the variable winning device 6330 is assembled in the state, a timing at which the movable effect member 6360 and the load generating device 500 interfere with each other may occur.

  That is, as shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 57, in this embodiment, the projecting portion 6368a of the movable effect member 6360 is in contact with the front surface of the second clutch member 530. When assembling to the plate 6060, the protruding portion 6368a interferes with the second clutch member 530, which may make assembly difficult.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the second clutch member 530 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction within a predetermined range. The distance in the moving direction of the predetermined movable range is equal to or less than the length of the gap required to secure the moving range in the axial direction of the first clutch member 520 generated in the use state. In other words, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the variable winning device 6330 to the base plate 6060 by utilizing the gap required in the use state.

  When assembling the movable effect member 6360, the second clutch member 530 is moved to the right (see FIG. 56 (b)) from the use state (see FIG. 56 (a)), so that the projecting portion Interference in the front-rear direction between 6368a and the second clutch member 530 can be avoided.

  Here, the chamfered portion 6368b is formed in the protruding portion 6368a, and therefore, when the movable effect member 6360 is assembled to the base plate 6060 (moved forward) due to the inclination of the chamfered portion 6368b, the first portion is protruded from the protruding portion 6368a. The load applied to the two-clutch member 530 can be tilted to the right, and the second clutch member 530 can be moved to the right from the use state (see E3 (a)) by the load. And interference in the front-rear direction of the protruding portion 6368a can be easily avoided.

  Since the chamfered portion 6368b is disposed on the opposite side of the second clutch member 530 after being in use (see FIG. 56 (a)), the chamfered portion 6368b and the second clutch member 530 are not in contact with each other. It is configured not to exist.

  A detailed configuration of the load generator 500 will be described. The load generator 500 is configured such that the first clutch member 520 that rotates by the driving force of the drive motor 510 and the second clutch member 530 that rotates coaxially with the rotation shaft of the first clutch member 520 can rotate synchronously. Is done.

  The drive motor 510 has a drive shaft 511 that is rotationally driven, a flange portion 512 that is integrally formed with the drive shaft 511 and has an enlarged diameter, and one end of the drive motor 510 that is locked to the flange portion 512 toward the front end side of the drive shaft 511. And a coil spring SP6a that generates an urging force.

  The drive shaft 511 has a D-shape (non-circular shape) in the axial cross section at the front end side of the flange portion 512. On the other hand, as will be described later, the shaft hole 522 of the first clutch member 520 is slightly larger than the axial sectional shape of the drive shaft 511 (corresponding to the axial sectional shape of the drive shaft 511 rather than the circular shape). Shape). Thereby, when the drive shaft 511 is inserted and rotated through the shaft hole 522 of the first clutch member 520, it is possible to prevent a phase shift between the drive shaft 511 and the first clutch member 520. .

  The urging force of the coil spring SP6a is loaded in a direction in which the first clutch member 520 and the second clutch member 530 are to be maintained in use (see FIG. 56 (a)). In this state of use, the driving force is transmitted as the first clutch member 520 and the second clutch member 530 come into contact with each other in the rotational direction. Next, the first clutch member 520 will be described with reference to FIG.

  58 (a) is a left side view of the first clutch member 520, and FIG. 58 (b) is a top view of the first clutch member 520 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LVIIIb in FIG. 58 (a). In the description of FIGS. 58A and 58B, FIGS. 56 and 57 are referred to as appropriate.

  The first clutch member 520 is a member that is pivotally supported by the drive shaft 511 in such a manner that the phase with respect to the drive shaft 511 is fixed while the movement in the axial direction is allowed. A shaft hole 522 drilled at the center of the main body 521 along the central axis of the main body 521, and a portion protruding in the axial direction from the left side surface of the main body 521, and a plurality of protrusions extending in the radial direction And a strip 523.

  As described above, the shaft hole 522 is formed in a D-shape that is slightly larger than the axial sectional shape of the drive shaft 511 (see FIG. 56A). As a result, the relative rotation of the first clutch member 520 with respect to the drive shaft 511 is restricted, and the axial movement of the first clutch member 520 with respect to the drive shaft 511 is allowed. Thus, while appropriately controlling the phase of the first clutch member 520, when the heavy load occurs, the first clutch member 520 is separated from the second clutch member 530, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force and transmitting the driving force. It is possible to prevent any of such members from being damaged.

  The protrusions 523 are formed with the same shape of protrusions at equal intervals. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), four ridges are formed at intervals of 90 degrees. The four ridges are only a result designed in accordance with the desired operation of the movable effect member 6360 that is moved by the transmitted driving force. If the desired operation is different, the number of ridges is determined. Will change. For example, the number of protrusions may be 1 to 3, or 5 or more. In addition, the operation | movement aspect of the movable production | presentation member 6360 in this embodiment is mentioned later.

  The radial cross-sectional shape of the protrusion 523 is a mountain shape that is inclined so as to become wider as both sides in the short direction approach the main body 521 when viewed in the radial direction (see FIG. 58B). The inclination angle is designed to be about 60 degrees.

  As a result, a load (load in the rotational direction) generated from the second clutch member 530 toward the first clutch member 520 during rotation of the first clutch member 520 can be directed in the axial direction of the first clutch member 520. (Axial component can be generated in the load). Next, the second clutch member 530 will be described with reference to FIG.

  59 (a) is a right side view of the second clutch member 530, and FIG. 59 (b) is a top view of the second clutch member 530 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXb in FIG. 59 (a). In FIG. 59A, the initial posture of the second clutch member 530 is shown. In the description of FIGS. 59A and 59B, FIGS. 56, 57, 58A, and 58B are referred to as appropriate.

  The second clutch member 530 is a member that is pivotally supported by the base plate 6060 so as to be rotatable coaxially with the first clutch member 520, and is formed on the disc-shaped main body portion 531 and the left side of the main body portion 531. A shaft bar portion 532 projecting in a circular cross section on the left surface side along the central axis from the step portion, and a portion protruding in the axial direction from the right side surface of the main body portion 531, and a plurality of portions disposed near the outer periphery It mainly includes a projecting point portion 533, an extending portion 534 extending from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 531 in the outer shape direction, and a weight portion 535 formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 531.

  The shaft bar portion 532 is slidably supported by the base plate 6060 (see FIG. 56A and FIG. 56B). The sliding movement of the second clutch member 530 occurs when the variable winning device 6330 is assembled to the base plate 6060 (occurs due to a load applied from the expansion unit 6368), and the second clutch member 530 is in the use state. It is configured not to slide (configured so that no load is applied from the expansion unit 6368).

  The protruding point portions 533 indicate each of a plurality of protruding points having the same shape, and are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), two protruding point portions 533 are formed at intervals of 180 degrees. Note that the number of the projecting point portions 533 is only two as the result of being designed in accordance with the desired operation of the movable effect member 6360 that is moved by the transmitted driving force. Will change. For example, one may be sufficient and three or more may be sufficient. In addition, the operation | movement aspect of the movable production | presentation member 6360 in this embodiment is mentioned later.

  The protruding point portion 533 has a shape obtained by cutting a cone in the middle of the height direction. That is, the outer shape in the axial direction is a circular shape, and is a mountain shape that is inclined in such a manner that the diameter increases as it approaches the main body portion 531 (see FIG. 59B). The inclination angle is designed to be about 60 degrees.

  When the projecting point portion 533 is arranged so as to enter the movement locus of the projecting portion 523 (see FIG. 58) in the use state, the projecting portion 523 is disposed at the projecting point when the first clutch member 520 rotates. The second clutch member 530 can be rotated by pushing the portion 533 and applying a load in the rotational direction to the second clutch member 530.

  When the rotational resistance of the second clutch member 530 becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value (when the second clutch member 530 cannot rotate at the same speed as the rotation of the first clutch member 520), the projecting point portion 533 to the ridge portion. The first clutch member 520 moves away from the second clutch member 530 against the urging force of the coil spring SP6a (see FIG. 56 (a)) due to a load (exhaust force generated between the opposing surfaces) applied to 523. To do.

  Thereby, it can avoid that an excessive load arises in the 2nd clutch member 530, and it can prevent that the 1st clutch member 520 or the 2nd clutch member 530 is damaged. When the second clutch member 530 moves in a direction away from the first clutch member 520, a leftward load is applied to the second clutch member 530 as a reaction from the first clutch member 520. Therefore, the second clutch member 530 is It is maintained at the position in use (see FIG. 56 (a)).

  The weight portion 535 is a weight for returning the posture of the second clutch member 530 when there is no load in the rotational direction from the first clutch member 520 to the second clutch member 530. That is, when a gap is generated between the protrusion 523 and the projecting point 533, the second clutch member 530 has the weight 535 disposed immediately below the shaft by the action of the weight of the weight 535. Rotate in a direction to return to the initial posture (see FIG. 59 (a)).

  The extending portion 534 is a portion that contacts the movable effect member 6360 and transmits a load. Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the configuration of the extending portion 534 and the operation in the usage state will be described.

  60 (a) to 60 (c) are right side views of the movable effect member 6360 and the second clutch member 530 showing the operations of the movable effect member 6360 and the second clutch member 530 in time series. FIG. 60D is a schematic view schematically showing the postures of the first clutch member 520 and the second clutch member 530 shown in FIG. 60A to FIG. 60C, respectively.

  In FIG. 60 (a), the tilted state of the movable effect member 6360 is an operation mode in which the initial posture of the second clutch member 530 is rotated forward by the driving force of the driving motor 510 (rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right). The contact starting posture of the first clutch member 520 (the posture in which the protruding portion 523 and the protruding point portion 533 start to contact) is illustrated with imaginary lines (see FIG. 60D). In FIG. 60B, the standing state of the movable effect member 6360 is the end posture of the second clutch member 530 (the end posture of the rotational operation of the second clutch member 530), and the contact end of the first clutch member 520. The postures are illustrated with imaginary lines, respectively (see FIG. 60 (e)). In FIG. 60C, the postures of the movable effect member 6360 and the second clutch member 530 are not changed from the state of FIG. 60B, and the first clutch member 520 is in the state of FIG. Further, the release posture, which is the posture immediately after the ridge portion 523 passes through the projecting point portion 533, is further indicated by an imaginary line (see FIG. 60F).

  As schematically shown in FIGS. 60A to 60C, in the present embodiment, a restriction stopper St is provided. The restriction stopper St is extended in such a manner as to enter the moving plane of the expansion portion 6368 from the step portion 2324a (see FIG. 55) of the front plate member 2320 (not shown in FIG. 55), and the reverse direction of the expansion portion 6368 Specifies the movement limit of. That is, the movement of the extension portion 6368 is restricted by contacting the restriction stopper St during movement (see FIG. 60B).

  The additional portion 6368 of the movable effect member 6360 and the second clutch member 530 are configured to be movable on the same plane orthogonal to the rotation axis. The extending portion 534 is an extended portion in which the rear side surface of the projecting portion 6368a and the front side surface of the extending portion 534 can come into contact with each other, but the outer peripheral surfaces of the extension portion 6368 and the transmission portion 2364 are not in contact with each other. Formed with length.

  Accordingly, the load applied from the movable effect member 6360 to the second clutch member 530 is limited to a mode applied via the protruding portion 6368a, and no load is applied via the peripheral surface. For this reason, it is possible to avoid the frictional force in the rotational direction from being applied to the second clutch member 530 from the movable effect member 6360.

  As shown in FIG. 60A to FIG. 60C, the extending portion 534 is illustrated as an outer shape of the movement locus of the extending rod-like portion 2353 (see FIG. 22B) of the second transmission member 2350. Arranged outside the operating range E6a. Therefore, the second clutch member 530 can operate without interfering with the second transmission member 2350 regardless of the posture of the second transmission member 2350.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), as the first clutch member 520 is pre-rotated from the contact start posture to the contact end posture, the projecting point portion 533 is moved to the protrusion 523. Pressed. Due to the pushing force at that time, the second clutch member 530 rotates forward from the initial posture to the terminal posture. At that time, by applying a forward load from the extending portion 534 to the protruding portion 6368a, the movable effect member 6360 can be changed from the tilted state to the standing state. That is, the movable effect member 6360 can be opened and closed by the driving force of the driving motor 510 (see FIG. 57) different from the driving force of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 22).

  The first clutch member 520 is formed in a periodic shape having a central angle of 90 degrees as a minimum unit. That is, the first clutch member 520 assumes a contact start posture every time it rotates 90 degrees.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 (b) and 60 (c), when the first clutch member 520 is further rotated forward after the second clutch member 530 is in the terminal posture, the second clutch member 530 is not allowed to project. Further movement is restricted by the installation portion 6368a. The subsequent operation of the first clutch member 520 will be described with reference to FIG.

  61 (a) to 61 (c), the operation of the first clutch member 520 is illustrated in time series. 61 (a) and 61 (b) are front perspective views of the first clutch member 520 and the second clutch member 530 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXIa in FIG. 60 (b), and FIG. It is a front perspective view of the 1st clutch member 520 and the 2nd clutch member 530 in the arrow LXIc direction view of 60 (c). In FIG. 61 (b), the first state from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a) to the posture in which the projecting tip of the ridge 523 and the projecting tip of the projecting point 533 are in contact in the left-right direction. The state after the clutch member 520 is pre-rotated is shown.

  61 (a) to 61 (c), when the first clutch member 520 further rotates further from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), the first clutch member 520 is directed toward the second clutch member 530. The reaction of the load applied in the rotation direction is applied to the first clutch member 520, so that the first clutch member 520 is separated from the second clutch member 530 along the axial direction (see FIG. 61B). . As a result, only the first clutch member 520 rotates forward and reaches the release posture while avoiding interference in the rotation direction between the protrusion 523 and the protrusion point 533 (see FIG. 61C).

  During this time, the second clutch member 530 is maintained in the end posture by the load applied in the left-right direction from the first clutch member 520. In other words, the posture of the second clutch member 530 is maintained by the frictional force applied from the first clutch member 520 to the second clutch member 530.

  Note that when it is desired to return the posture of the second clutch member 530 to the initial posture immediately after the state shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to comprise the weight part 535 by the weight only to overcome. For example, a metal material may be mixed in the weight portion 535 to partially increase the weight.

  Returning to FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 60C, the protrusion 523 is disposed on the front rotation side of the protruding point 533, and there is no portion that stops the rear rotation of the second clutch member 530. Therefore, the second clutch member 530 is not provided. Is rotated backward by its own weight of the weight portion 535, and returns to the initial posture (see FIG. 60A). Then, when the forward load applied from the second clutch member 530 to the movable effect member 6360 disappears, the movable effect member 6360 rotates forward toward the tilted state (see FIG. 60A).

  Further, by continuing the rotation of the drive motor 510 in the same direction, the first clutch member 520 is again in the contact start posture (position rotated 90 degrees from the initial contact start posture), and as described above, the second clutch member 530 is pre-rotated.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the state where the second transmission member 2350 (see FIG. 22B) is separated from the movable effect member 6360 (the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 22A)) is excited (driven). ), The movable effect member 6360 can be repeatedly opened and closed (can be intermittently operated) by continuously rotating the drive motor 510 in one direction (the direction in which the first clutch member 520 is rotated in the forward direction).

  The load applied from the second clutch member 530 to the movable effect member 6360 is limited to a load in a direction in which the movable effect member 6360 is moved from the tilted state toward the standing state (limited to a single direction). Similarly, the load applied to the movable effect member 6360 by the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 22A) is limited to a load in the direction in which the movable effect member 6360 is moved from the tilted state toward the standing state. (Limited to a single direction).

  That is, when the drive motor 510 and the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 22A) are cooperatively driven, the second transmission member 2350 (see FIG. 22B) and the second clutch member 530 are moved to the movable effect member 6360. Even when they approach and come into contact with each other at the same time, the driving force is not transmitted to each other via the movable effect member 6360.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving force generated by the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 2333 from being transmitted to the load generating device 500 via the movable effect member 6360, and the driving force of the drive motor 510 via the movable effect member 6360. Thus, transmission to the second transmission member 2350 can be prevented (transmission of driving force can be blocked in both directions).

  When the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 22A) is released and the movable effect member 6360 is raised, the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) is driven to rotate in the forward rotation direction. When the operation of the second clutch member 530 is shown in time series, the movement described with reference to FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (c) except that the movable effect member 6360 is raised in FIG. 60 (a). And no different. That is, the load generating device 500 can intermittently operate in the same operation mode regardless of whether the movable effect member 6360 is in a tilted state or in a standing state.

  The case where the rotational resistance between the first clutch member 520 and the second clutch member 530 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value is not limited to the situation described with reference to FIGS. 60 (b) and 60 (c). For example, when a ball engagement occurs between the movable upper cover member 332 (see FIG. 56A) and the movable effect member 6360 and the time until the movable effect member 6360 changes to the standing state becomes longer, the movable effect member 6360 The first clutch member 520 is separated from the second clutch member 530 and the rotation is continued without waiting for the motor to stand up (in the posture between FIG. 60 (a) and FIG. 60 (b)). The first clutch member 520 is in the release posture. Note that the release posture of the first clutch member 520 is defined by the relative relationship with the second clutch member 530, and is not limited to the posture shown in FIG.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the timing at which the first clutch member 520 is separated from the second clutch member 530 and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted can be set to an arbitrary timing. It is possible to prevent an excessive driving force from being transmitted to the movable effect member 6360 at the time of an unexpected failure, and the durability of the movable effect member 6360 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the movable effect member 6360 has been described as a member to which a driving force is transmitted from both the solenoid 2333 and the load generator 500, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the formation of the extended rod-like portion 2353 (see FIG. 22B) of the second transmission member 2350 is omitted, or the formation of the first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350 is omitted. The driving force may not be transmitted from 2333 to the movable effect member 6360. In this case, regardless of the operation state of the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 6360 can be tilted independently (reciprocating motion of tilting up or repeating) by controlling the drive of the drive motor 510.

  In this case, various timings are exemplified as the operation timing of the movable effect member 6360. For example, the movable effect member 6360 may be tilted as an example of an effect when the special symbol lottery is missed. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the player has missed, and the player can be prompted to launch a ball. Further, for example, the movable effect member 6360 may be tilted as an example of an operation mode when the special symbol lottery is a small hit. In this case, since the movable upper cover member 332 is maintained in the closed state, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out at the small hit. Further, for example, when the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the movable effect member 6360 may be tilted during the opening time OP of the big hit game. In this case, a plurality of types of operation modes of the movable effect member 6360 are configured, and the expectation for the big hit game is given to the occurrence ratio of each operation mode by associating the magnitude of the profit obtained by the player with the movable effect member 6360. Depending on the mode of operation, you can speak.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, the chamfered portion 6368b that applies a load to the second clutch member 530 of the load generating device 500 is used in order to avoid interference with the load generating device 500 when the variable winning device 6330 is assembled to the base plate 6060. In a state, it is formed at a position where it cannot contact the second clutch member 530. In this case, since the shape of the chamfered portion 6368b can be designed without considering the influence on the operation of the second clutch member 530 in the use state, the design freedom of the chamfered portion 6368b can be improved.

  According to the present embodiment, the load generating device 500 is configured as a device for transmitting a driving force to the movable effect member 6360 to change the state, and cancels the transmission of the driving force when an excessive load occurs. Clutch mechanisms (first clutch member 520, second clutch member 530) are provided. In this case, even if an excessive load is generated between the movable effect member 6360 and the load generating device 500 due to a ball clogging or the like, it is possible to avoid the movable effect member 6360 from being damaged thereby.

  According to the present embodiment, the load generator 500 can intermittently operate the movable effect member 6360 by driving the drive motor 510 in one direction, and the drive direction of the drive motor 510 is via the movable effect member 6360. Thus, the second transmission member 2350 is set in a direction that does not apply a load. In this case, it is possible to avoid the driving force of the driving motor 510 being transmitted to the second transmission member 2350, and the driving force of the driving motor 510 is damaged by the second transmission member 2350 via the movable effect member 6360. Can be prevented.

  According to this embodiment, the operation mode of the load generator 500 when the drive motor 510 is rotated is the same regardless of whether the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) or released (excited). It is comprised so that it may become. In this case, since it is not necessary to determine the operation timing of the load generating device 500 based on the state of the solenoid 2333, the degree of freedom in controlling the operation timing of the solenoid 2333 and the drive motor 510 can be improved.

  According to the present embodiment, the transmission of the driving force of the driving motor 510 to the movable effect member 6360 can be released at an arbitrary timing. That is, the driving force transmission is not canceled according to the control mode of the driving motor 510, but the driving force transmission is canceled at the timing when an excessive load is generated. In this case, it is possible to prevent an excessive driving force from being transmitted to the movable effect member 6360 when a failure such as a ball bite or a ball clogging that is difficult to predict the occurrence timing occurs, and the durability of the movable effect member 6360 can be prevented. Can be improved.

<Fourth operation pattern>
An example of the playability that can be realized using the configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing changes in time of the movable upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 6360, the second clutch member 530, and the drive motor 510 in the fourth operation pattern.

  In FIG. 62, the operation of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) is omitted from the illustration of the above-described shift of the operation start timing, and starts operating at the same point. It is illustrated as a thing.

  If the MPU 201 (refer to FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts the control of the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure change display (design change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

  In the case of a jackpot game of jackpot I (see FIG. 67) described later, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the movable upper cover member 332 operates based on the fourth operation pattern, The MPU 221 drives and controls the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) so that the second clutch member 530 operates so that the movable effect member 6360 operates based on the operation pattern.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). And the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the movable upper cover member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to thereby receive the specific prize opening 65a ( The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open (see FIG. 56A), and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  At the same time, the MPU 221 drives the drive motor 510 so that the second clutch member 530 is in the end posture before the opening time OP elapses, and the first clutch member 520 is in the contact end posture (FIG. 60B). The drive motor 510 is maintained in a state of being stopped at (see). The state of the drive motor 510 is maintained until the first round game R ends.

  In the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced to the closed state (the extended state) and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. .

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the fourth operation pattern, the movable effect member 6360 can be maintained in the standing state during the round game R of the first round. In this case, since the substantial left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56 (a)) can be maintained narrow (can be the width of the lower passage 331b), the movable effect member 6360 tilts. In comparison with the round game R that changes to the state, it is possible to give the player an impression that the flow resistance of the specific winning opening 65a of the game ball is increased. Further, since the game ball only passes through the sensor S, and does not pass through the third sensor S3, a plurality of game balls are compared with the case where the game ball passes through both the sensor S and the third sensor S3. The flow trajectory of the game ball can be kept narrow.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means solenoid 2333 keeps the movable upper cover member 332 in the closed state (the extended state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R starts after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the moving upper cover member 332 is changed from the closed state (extended state) to the open state ( The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be displaced to the retracted state to open the specific winning opening 65a, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (extension state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between each round game R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the movable upper cover member 332 is closed (the extended state) ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the round game R of the last round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means holds the moving upper cover member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. It is controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  In the fourth operation pattern, only the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the first round game R is described, and the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the second and subsequent round games R is The operation pattern 4 may be continued or may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, the fourth operation pattern may be adopted for the round game R in the predetermined round, and the round game R in the first round may be set as another operation pattern.

<Fifth operation pattern>
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing changes in time of the movable upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 6360, the second clutch member 530, the drive motor 510, the sensor S, and the third sensor S3 in the fifth operation pattern. In the drawings of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, an ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball is detected. Further, the prescribed number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a indicates the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

  In FIG. 63, the operation of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) is omitted from the illustration of the above-described shift in the operation start timing, and starts operating at the same point. It is illustrated as a thing.

  If the MPU 201 (refer to FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts the control of the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure change display (design change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

  In the case of a jackpot game with a jackpot K (see FIG. 67), which will be described later, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper cover member 332 operates based on the fifth operation pattern. The MPU 221 drives and controls the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) so that the second clutch member 530 operates so that the movable effect member 6360 operates based on the operation pattern.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). And the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the movable upper cover member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to thereby receive the specific prize opening 65a ( The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open (see FIG. 56A), and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  At the same time, the MPU 221 drives the drive motor 510 so that the second clutch member 530 assumes the initial posture before the opening time OP elapses, and the first clutch member 520 is in the contact start posture (FIG. 60A). The drive motor 510 is maintained in a state of being stopped at (see).

  When a predetermined time (3 seconds in the fifth operation pattern) elapses from the start of the first round game R, the drive motor 510 is driven at a constant speed and pre-rotates to intermittently operate the second clutch member 530. The constant speed drive of the drive motor 510 is continued until the first round game R is completed.

  In the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced to the closed state (the extended state) and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. .

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the fifth operation pattern, in the first round game R, the movable effect member until a predetermined time (3 seconds in the fifth operation pattern) elapses from the start of the round game R. After 6360 is in a tilted state and a predetermined time has elapsed, the movable effect member 6360 repeatedly changes state between a standing state and a tilted state.

  That is, since the movable effect member 6360 continues to operate intermittently, the attention to the movable effect member 6360 during the round game R can be improved.

  In this intermittent operation, the movable effect member 6360 is applied in a direction (rising direction) in which the load from the drive motor 510 is separated from the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 56A). Therefore, even if a game ball is sandwiched between the inner rail 61 and the movable effect member 6360, the load applied to the game ball from the movable effect member 6360 is limited to the load due to the weight of the movable effect member 6360. The possibility that the flow will stop can be reduced.

  In addition, as described above, two patterns of the flow path of the game ball are prepared depending on whether the upper surface side of the movable effect member 6360 flows down or the lower surface side (front side) of the movable effect member 6360 flows down. Sensors (opening for discharging game balls) through which the game balls flowed down pass are also configured differently. That is, when the movable effect member 6360 is standing (see FIG. 56A), the game ball flows down to the sensor S, and when the movable effect member 6360 is tilted (see FIG. 56B), the game ball is It flows down to the third sensor S3.

  In this case, it is possible to give more force to the behavior of the plurality of game balls as compared to the case where the game balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56A) are discharged from the opening at the same position. (The flow trajectory of a plurality of game balls can be produced in three dimensions).

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means solenoid 2333 keeps the movable upper cover member 332 in the closed state (the extended state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R starts after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  Here, in the fifth operation pattern, the drive motor 510 is controlled to continue after the end of the first round game R, or the drive motor 510 is controlled before the end of the first round game R or Regardless of whether the stop control is performed simultaneously with the end, the drive control of the solenoid 2333 can limit the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the first interval time Int1 between rounds to the standing state.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the moving upper cover member 332 is changed from the closed state (extended state) to the open state ( The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be displaced to the retracted state to open the specific winning opening 65a, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (extension state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between each round game R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the movable upper cover member 332 is closed (the extended state) ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the round game R of the last round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means holds the moving upper cover member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. It is controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  In the fifth operation pattern, only the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the first round game R is described, and the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the second and subsequent round games R is The operation pattern 5 may be continued or may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, the fifth operation pattern may be adopted for the round game R in the predetermined round, and the round game R in the first round may be set as another operation pattern.

  Further, the predetermined time is set as a time shorter than the shortest time that elapses until a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of game balls pass through the specific winning opening 65a in a normal game manner. It is not limited to 3 seconds. For example, the time may be less than 3 seconds, or may be longer than 3 seconds (for example, 7 seconds).

<Sixth operation pattern>
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing changes in time of the movable upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 6360, the second clutch member 530, the drive motor 510, the sensor S, and the third sensor S3 in the sixth operation pattern. In the drawings of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, an ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball is detected. Further, the prescribed number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a indicates the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

  In FIG. 64, the operation of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) is omitted from the illustration of the above-described shift in the operation start timing, and starts operating at the same point. It is illustrated as a thing.

  If the MPU 201 (refer to FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts the control of the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure change display (design change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

  In the case of a jackpot game with a jackpot e (see FIG. 67), which will be described later, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates based on the sixth operation pattern. The MPU 221 drives and controls the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) so that the second clutch member 530 operates so that the movable effect member 6360 operates based on the operation pattern.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). And the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the movable upper cover member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to thereby open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be opened, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  At the same time, the MPU 221 drives the drive motor 510 so that the second clutch member 530 assumes the initial posture before the opening time OP elapses, and the first clutch member 520 is in the contact start posture (FIG. 60A). The drive motor 510 is maintained in a state of being stopped at (see).

  From the start of round game R in the first round, the total number of game balls detected by sensor S reaches a predetermined number (six in the sixth operation pattern) less than the prescribed number (in this embodiment, ten). In response to this, the drive motor 510 is driven so that the second clutch member 530 changes to the end position, and the first clutch member 520 is driven in a state of stopping in the contact end position (see FIG. 60B). The motor 510 is maintained (stop control is performed).

  In the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced to the closed state (the extended state) and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. .

  After the end of the first round game R, the drive motor is configured so that the first clutch member 520 returns to the contact start posture (see FIG. 60A) through the release posture (see FIG. 60C). The rotational drive 510 is resumed.

  As shown in FIG. 64, in the sixth operation pattern, a predetermined number of game balls (six in the sixth operation pattern) from the start of the round game R are detected by the sensor S during the round game R of the first round. Until this is done, the movable effect member 6360 is tilted, and after a predetermined number of game balls are detected by the sensor S, the movable effect member 6360 is raised.

  That is, the movable effect member 6360 changes to the standing state before the movable upper lid member 332 changes to the closed state (the overhanging state). Therefore, the player can easily predict the timing when the movable upper cover member 332 changes to the closed state (the extended state) by checking the state of the movable effect member 6360 in a timely manner. As a result, the player can easily adjust the launching mode of the game balls, and can reduce waste balls.

  That is, the number of game balls entering the out port 314 (see FIG. 54) during the jackpot game can be reduced as compared to a game mode in which the game balls are continuously fired during the jackpot game.

  For example, in the case where the game ball is continuously launched, the game ball before the game ball reaches the lower end position of the game area (the position where the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56A) is arranged). Assume that four gaming balls fired after the ball is fired are configured to stay in the gaming area. In this case, if the launch of the game ball is stopped with the fact that the movable effect member 6360 has changed to the standing state, the movable upper cover member 332 is moved until the four game balls staying in the game area have flowed through the game area. It is maintained in the open state (retracted state). Therefore, even if all the four game balls that have been staying are directed to the specific prize opening 65a, any of the game balls is blocked by the moving upper lid member 332 and passes through the specific prize opening 65a. There will be no situation where you cannot.

  On the other hand, if any of the four game balls that have stayed passes through the entrances other than the specific prize opening 65a and is discharged from the game area, the game balls pass through the special prize opening 65a. Since the number of game balls to be played does not exceed the prescribed number, the movable upper cover member 332 is maintained in the open state (retracted state). In this case, the player fires one game ball (single shot) and confirms whether or not it passes through the specific winning opening 65a, and the confirmation is completed, and the movable upper lid member 332 is still in the open state (retracted state). ), The game ball is released in the game area at the first interval time Int1 between rounds by repeating one of the following: It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball that has reached the lower end position is blocked from flowing down by the moving upper lid member 332 and passes through the out port 314.

  In other words, when the movable effect member 6360 is in a tilted state, the game ball is continuously fired (without hitting), and when the movable effect member 6360 is in the standing state, the release of the game ball is suppressed (single shot). As described above, by switching the firing mode, it is possible to achieve both the smooth digestion of the big hit game and the reduction of the number of useless balls that reach the lower end position of the game area in the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  Since the timing of the change of the firing mode corresponds to the timing of the state change of the movable effect member 6360, the player is near the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56 (a)) where the movable effect member 6360 is arranged. If attention is paid to, it is possible to easily grasp the timing of switching the firing mode.

  Since the ball enters the third sensor S3 having a short distance from the moving upper cover member 332 from the start of the round until the six balls enter the sensor S, the first prize ball is paid out from the start of the round. It is possible to shorten the period until it occurs. In addition, since the six balls enter the sensor S after the ball enters the sensor S until the end of the round, the ball enters the sensor S having a long separation distance from the moving upper lid member 332, so that the sphere that has passed the moving upper lid member 332 The period until the sensor S is reached can be lengthened. Thereby, compared with the case where a ball can enter the third sensor S3 during the round game R, it is possible to increase the possibility of over winning. The same applies to a seventh operation pattern described later.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means solenoid 2333 keeps the movable upper cover member 332 in the closed state (the extended state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R starts after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  In the sixth operation pattern, the state of the movable effect member 6360 at the first interval time Int1 between rounds can be limited to the standing state by the drive control of the solenoid 2333 regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the moving upper cover member 332 is changed from the closed state (extended state) to the open state ( The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be displaced to the retracted state to open the specific winning opening 65a, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (extension state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between each round game R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the movable upper cover member 332 is closed (the extended state) ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the round game R of the last round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means holds the moving upper cover member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. It is controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  In the sixth operation pattern, only the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the first round game R is described, and the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the second and subsequent round games R is The operation pattern 6 may be continued or may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, the sixth operation pattern may be adopted for the round game R in the predetermined round, and the round game R in the first round may be set as another operation pattern.

  Further, the predetermined number less than the prescribed number is not limited to six. For example, it may be 5 or less, or may be 7 or more and less than the specified number.

<Seventh operation pattern>
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing changes in the outputs of the moving upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 6360, the second clutch member 530, the drive motor 510, the sensor S, and the third sensor S3 in the seventh operation pattern. is there. In the drawings of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, an ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball is detected. Further, the prescribed number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a indicates the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

  In FIG. 65, the operation of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) is omitted from the illustration of the above-described shift in the operation start timing, and starts operating at the same point. It is illustrated as a thing.

  If the MPU 201 (refer to FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts the control of the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure change display (design change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

  In the case of a jackpot game of jackpot f (see FIG. 67) described later, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper cover member 332 operates based on the seventh operation pattern. The MPU 221 drives and controls the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) so that the second clutch member 530 operates so that the movable effect member 6360 operates based on the operation pattern.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). And the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the movable upper cover member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to thereby open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be opened, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  At the same time, the MPU 221 drives the drive motor 510 so that the second clutch member 530 is in the end posture before the opening time OP elapses, and the first clutch member 520 is in the contact end posture (FIG. 60B). The drive motor 510 is maintained in a state of being stopped at (see).

  The state of the drive motor 510 is maintained until a predetermined time (3 seconds in the seventh operation pattern) elapses from the start of the round game R in the first round. Thereafter, in order to bring the second clutch member 530 into the end posture, the drive motor 510 is driven in the forward rotation direction until the first clutch member 520 reaches the contact end posture (see FIG. 60B).

  Then, from the start of the first round game R, the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S is less than a specified number (10 in this embodiment) (6 in the seventh operation pattern). Triggered by reaching the position, the drive motor 510 is driven so that the second clutch member 530 changes to the end position, and the first clutch member 520 stops in the contact end position (see FIG. 60B). To maintain the drive motor 510 (stop control).

  In the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced to the closed state (the extended state) and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. .

  According to the control described above, at the start of the first round game R, the movable effect member 6360 is in an upright state so that the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56A) is closed (game ball). On the other hand, the movable effect member 6360 is tilted with a lapse of a predetermined time, thereby giving the player the impression that the game ball has easily entered the specific winning opening 65a. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to visually change the impression of the ease of entering the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a during the round game R.

  After the end of the first round game R, the drive motor is configured so that the first clutch member 520 returns to the contact start posture (see FIG. 60A) through the release posture (see FIG. 60C). The rotational drive 510 is resumed.

  Note that the time that elapses until the predetermined number (six in the seventh operation pattern) of the game balls passes through the sensor S from the limit of the launch interval of the game balls (0.6 second interval) is the predetermined time. (In the seventh operation pattern, it is unlikely to be shorter than 3 seconds), but in this operation pattern, when a predetermined number of game balls pass the sensor S before a predetermined time elapses in order to prevent malfunction. Is controlled so as to cancel the drive control of the drive motor 510 when a predetermined time has elapsed (the drive motor 510 is maintained as it is and the second clutch member 530 is maintained in the terminal posture). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring due to a difference in the winning frequency.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means solenoid 2333 keeps the movable upper cover member 332 in the closed state (the extended state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R starts after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  In the seventh operation pattern, the state of the movable effect member 6360 at the first interval time Int1 between rounds can be limited to the standing state by the drive control of the solenoid 2333 regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510.

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the seventh operation pattern, a predetermined number of game balls (six in the seventh operation pattern) from the start of the round game R are included in the first round game R. After being detected by the three sensors S3, the movable effect member 6360 is brought up.

  That is, the movable effect member 6360 changes to the standing state before the movable upper lid member 332 changes to the closed state (the overhanging state). Therefore, the player can easily predict the timing when the movable upper cover member 332 changes to the closed state (the extended state) by checking the state of the movable effect member 6360 in a timely manner. As a result, the player can easily adjust the launching mode of the game balls, and can reduce waste balls.

  That is, the number of game balls entering the out port 314 (see FIG. 54) during the jackpot game can be reduced as compared to a game mode in which the game balls are continuously fired during the jackpot game.

  For example, in the case where the game ball is continuously launched, the game ball before the game ball reaches the lower end position of the game area (the position where the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56A) is arranged). Assume that four gaming balls fired after the ball is fired are configured to stay in the gaming area. In this case, if the launch of the game ball is stopped with the fact that the movable effect member 6360 has changed to the standing state, the movable upper cover member 332 is moved until the four game balls staying in the game area have flowed through the game area. It is maintained in the open state (retracted state). Therefore, even if all the four game balls that have been staying are directed to the specific prize opening 65a, any of the game balls is blocked by the moving upper lid member 332 and passes through the specific prize opening 65a. There will be no situation where you cannot.

  On the other hand, if any of the four game balls that have stayed passes through the entrances other than the specific prize opening 65a and is discharged from the game area, the game balls pass through the special prize opening 65a. Since the number of game balls to be played does not exceed the prescribed number, the movable upper cover member 332 is maintained in the open state (retracted state). In this case, the player fires one game ball (single shot) and confirms whether or not it passes through the specific winning opening 65a, and the confirmation is completed, and the movable upper lid member 332 is still in the open state (retracted state). ), The game ball is released in the game area at the first interval time Int1 between rounds by repeating one of the following: It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball that has reached the lower end position is blocked from flowing down by the moving upper lid member 332 and passes through the out port 314.

  In other words, when the movable effect member 6360 is in a tilted state, the game ball is continuously fired (without hitting), and when the movable effect member 6360 is in the standing state, the release of the game ball is suppressed (single shot). As described above, by switching the firing mode, it is possible to achieve both the smooth digestion of the big hit game and the reduction of the number of useless balls that reach the lower end position of the game area in the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  Since the timing of the change of the firing mode corresponds to the timing of the state change of the movable effect member 6360, the player is near the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56 (a)) where the movable effect member 6360 is arranged. If attention is paid to, it is possible to easily grasp the timing of switching the firing mode.

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means solenoid 2333 keeps the movable upper cover member 332 in the closed state (the extended state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R starts after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  In the seventh operation pattern, the state of the movable effect member 6360 at the first interval time Int1 between rounds can be limited to the standing state by the drive control of the solenoid 2333 regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the moving upper cover member 332 is changed from the closed state (extended state) to the open state ( The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be displaced to the retracted state to open the specific winning opening 65a, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (extension state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between each round game R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the movable upper cover member 332 is closed (the extended state) ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the round game R of the last round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means holds the moving upper cover member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. It is controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  In the seventh operation pattern, only the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the first round game R is described, and the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the second and subsequent round games R is 7 may be continued or may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, the seventh operation pattern may be adopted for the round game R in the predetermined round, and the round game R in the first round may be set as another operation pattern.

  Further, the predetermined time is set as a time shorter than the shortest time that elapses until a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of game balls pass through the specific winning opening 65a in a normal game manner. It is not limited to 3 seconds. For example, the time may be less than 3 seconds, or may be longer than 3 seconds (for example, 7 seconds).

  Further, the predetermined number less than the prescribed number is not limited to six. For example, it may be 5 or less, or may be 7 or more and less than the specified number.

  Also, the predetermined time may be set to 15 seconds, for example, by making it longer than the shortest time that elapses until a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls pass through the specific winning opening 65a. good. In this case, there may occur a case where a predetermined number of balls pass through the specific winning opening 65a before the predetermined time elapses, and the movable effect member 6360 stands up because the second clutch member 530 is maintained in the terminal posture. The round game R can be ended in the state.

  Therefore, if a game is made so that a predetermined number of balls pass through the specific winning opening 65a before the predetermined time elapses, the ball does not pass through the third sensor S3, and the ball passes exclusively through the sensor S. On the other hand, in order for the ball to pass through the third sensor S3, it is necessary to drive the drive motor 510 after a predetermined time to bring the movable effect member 6360 into a tilted state. It is desirable to reduce the number of balls entering the ball.

  Therefore, a profit exceeding the profit that the player can obtain by the ball that has passed the sensor S is set to the ball that has passed the third sensor S3 (for example, a profit that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is shifted to the high probability state). By doing so, it is possible to guide the player to launch a ball in the round game R in a game mode in which the balls passing through the specific winning opening 65a during a predetermined time are suppressed. In this case, this guidance may be performed by a display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In other words, when the round game R is started, it is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 by displaying “Probably change if entering the ball for 15 seconds!”, Corresponding to the game mode that maximizes the profit that the player can obtain. Thus, it is possible to suppress the number of balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a at the start of the round game R. It should be noted that, by not displaying the predetermined time, simply displaying “Probably change when stopping the ball” and switching to a display such as “Still!” As the predetermined time elapses. You may make it alert | report.

<Eighth operation pattern>
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing changes in the outputs of the movable upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 6360, the second clutch member 530, the drive motor 510, the sensor S, and the third sensor S3 in the eighth operation pattern. is there. In the drawings of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, an ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball is detected. Further, the prescribed number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a indicates the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

  In FIG. 66, the operation of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) is omitted from the illustration of the above-described shift in the operation start timing, and starts operating at the same point. It is illustrated as a thing.

  If the MPU 201 (refer to FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts the control of the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure change display (design change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

  In the case of a jackpot game with a jackpot g (see FIG. 67), which will be described later, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates based on the eighth operation pattern. The MPU 221 drives and controls the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) so that the second clutch member 530 operates so that the movable effect member 6360 operates based on the operation pattern.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). And the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the movable upper cover member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to thereby open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be opened, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  At the same time, the MPU 221 drives the drive motor 510 so that the second clutch member 530 is in the end posture before the opening time OP elapses, and the first clutch member 520 is in the contact end posture (FIG. 60B). The drive motor 510 is maintained in a state of being stopped at (see).

  The maintenance of the state of the drive motor 510 is continued until a predetermined time (3 seconds in the eighth operation pattern) elapses from the start of the round game R in the first round. Thereafter, the drive motor 510 is rotationally driven in the forward rotation direction so that the first clutch member 520 returns to the contact start posture (see FIG. 60A) through the release posture (see FIG. 60C). Resumed. Accordingly, the second clutch member 530 is in the initial posture (see FIG. 60A), and the movable effect member 6360 is in a tilted state.

  In the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced to the closed state (the extended state) and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. .

  According to the control described above, at the start of the first round game R, the movable upper cover member 332 is in an upright state so that the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56 (a)) is closed (game ball). On the other hand, the moving upper lid member 332 is tilted with a lapse of a predetermined time, so that the player feels that the game ball easily enters the specific winning opening 65a. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to visually change the impression of the ease of entering the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a during the round game R.

  In addition, when the movable effect member 6360 is operated in the eighth operation pattern also in the round game R after the second round, during the first interval time Int1 between rounds after the end of the first round game R. The second clutch member 530 is preferably set to the end posture by rotationally driving the drive motor 510 in the forward rotation direction until the first clutch member 520 reaches the contact end posture (see FIG. 60B).

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means solenoid 2333 keeps the movable upper cover member 332 in the closed state (the extended state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R starts after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  In the eighth operation pattern, the state of the movable effect member 6360 at the first interval time Int1 between rounds can be limited to the standing state by the drive control of the solenoid 2333 regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510.

  As shown in FIG. 66, in the eighth operation pattern, at the end timing of the round game R, the second clutch member 530 is in the initial posture and does not affect the operation of the movable effect member 6360 (movable effect). Arranged outside the motion trajectory of member 6360). Therefore, the operation of the movable effect member 6360 is due to the load applied through the first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350 (see FIG. 18), and the feature thereof has been described in the first operation pattern described above. Since it is as it is, description is abbreviate | omitted here.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the moving upper cover member 332 is changed from the closed state (extended state) to the open state ( The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be displaced to the retracted state to open the specific winning opening 65a, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (extension state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between each round game R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the movable upper cover member 332 is closed (the extended state) ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the round game R of the last round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means holds the moving upper cover member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. It is controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  In the eighth operation pattern, only the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the first round game R is described, and the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the second and subsequent round games R is The operation pattern of 8 may be continued or may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, the eighth operation pattern may be adopted for the round game R in the predetermined round, and the round game R in the first round may be set as another operation pattern.

  Further, the predetermined time is set as a time shorter than the shortest time that elapses until a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of game balls pass through the specific winning opening 65a in a normal game manner. It is not limited to 3 seconds. For example, the time may be less than 3 seconds, or may be longer than 3 seconds (for example, 7 seconds).

  With reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C4 in the sixth embodiment and the big hit type in the special symbol will be described. FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C4 and the big hit type in the special symbol in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 68 is a movable effect member in the big win type and the round game R It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence with the state of 6360. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C4 includes each big hit type, It is defined in association with the type of winning a prize that became a lottery opportunity for special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C4 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first winning port 64) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 34”. Is defined in association with jackpot I (see 202b61 in FIG. 67).

  When the jackpot is I, a six-round jackpot game is executed in the fourth operation pattern of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360. In this case, the player can receive about 900 prize balls, and after the jackpot game, the player shifts to the normal symbol time-saving state until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is “35 to 49”, jackpot J is associated and defined (see 202b62 in FIG. 67).

  In the case of jackpot J, 10 rounds of jackpot game is a long opening operation (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360, or The operation is performed in an open state until a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls are won. In this case, the player can receive about 1500 prize balls, and after the jackpot game, from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot, a special symbol with a high probability state and a normal symbol The (2nd symbol) winning probability is increased, and the second winning opening 640 is shifted to a state where it is easy to win a ball.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is “50 to 99”, the big hit K is associated and defined (see 202b63 in FIG. 67).

  When the jackpot is K, 15 rounds of the jackpot game are executed with the fifth operation pattern of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360. In this case, the player can receive about 2250 prize balls, and after the jackpot game, from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot, a special symbol with a high probability state and a normal symbol The (2nd symbol) winning probability is increased, and the second winning opening 640 is shifted to a state where it is easy to win a ball.

  As described above, when the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first winning port 64) is a big win, the difference in the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds. As the number increases, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases and the time required for the jackpot game also increases.

  According to the present embodiment, in the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1, by confirming the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the round game R, it is possible to determine the outline of the profit that the player can obtain by the jackpot that has been won. it can.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 68, when the acquired jackpot is a jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot ends, the movable effect member 6360 changes to a tilted state at the start of the round game R. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot that shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, at the start of the round game R, the movable effect member 6360 is maintained in the standing state. Therefore, by paying attention to the movable effect member 6360 at the start of the round game R, it is possible to confirm whether or not to shift to the high probability state after the big hit.

  In addition, in the case of jackpot I, as described above in the fourth operation pattern (see FIG. 62), the substantial left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56 (a)) can be kept narrow. Therefore, compared to the case where the substantial left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a is the maximum (when the substantial left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a is the same as the left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a), the game ball It is possible to give the player an impression that the passing speed of the specific winning opening 65a is slow. Thereby, the player can understand that the jackpot I is a jackpot with a small profit that the player can obtain by the manner of passage of the game ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a.

  Since the movable effect member 6360 starts operating earlier than the moving upper lid member 332 (see FIG. 54) as described above, the player moves the upper moving lid member 332 into an open state (retracted state), Before the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56 (a)) is opened, it can be confirmed whether or not to shift to the high probability state after the jackpot.

  In addition, after the movable effect member 6360 is in the tilted state, the movable effect member 6360 operates in a state in which the state change is repeated between the standing state and the tilted state as compared with the case where the round game R is ended in the tilted state. There are more rounds in jackpots. Therefore, the player can determine the number of rounds in the jackpot by confirming the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360. Therefore, not only at the start of the round game R but also in the middle of the round game R, it is possible to improve attention to the movable effect member 6360. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds when the movable effect member 6360 repeats the state change is set to the maximum number of rounds that can be acquired.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second winning port 640) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 is within the range of “0 to 49”. e is associated and defined (see 202b64 in FIG. 67).

  When the jackpot e is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed with the sixth operation pattern of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360. In this case, the player can receive about 2250 prize balls (maximum payout). After the jackpot game, the probability of a special symbol is high from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot. The state and the normal symbol (second symbol) hit probability is increased, and the second winning port 640 is shifted to a state where it is easy to win.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is “50 to 59”, the big hit f is associated and defined (see 202b65 of F21 (a)).

  When the jackpot f is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed. In this case, the player can receive about 2250 prize balls, and after the jackpot game, from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot, a special symbol with a high probability state and a normal symbol The (2nd symbol) winning probability is increased, and the second winning opening 640 is shifted to a state where it is easy to win a ball.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is “60 to 99”, the big hit g is associated and defined (see 202b66 of F21 (a)).

  When the jackpot g is reached, a six-round jackpot game is executed. In this case, the player can receive about 900 prize balls, and after the jackpot game, the player shifts to the normal symbol time-saving state until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

  As described above, the jackpot generated in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second winning port 640) is the jackpot e, f (the jackpot of the maximum payout number) with a probability of 60%. Therefore, compared with the number of payouts expected in the case of winning a special symbol 1 lottery, the number of payouts expected in the case of winning a special symbol 2 lottery can be increased.

  Therefore, the profit obtained by the player greatly changes depending on whether the jackpot is e, f or the jackpot g, so that the attention to which jackpot is selected as the jackpot selected in the lottery of the special symbol 2 is improved. Can improve the interest of the player.

  According to the present embodiment, in the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 2, by confirming the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the round game R, it is possible to determine the outline of the profit that the player can obtain by the jackpot that has been won. it can.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 68, when the acquired jackpot is a jackpot e that is a jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot ends, the movable effect member 6360 changes to a tilted state at the start of the round game R. On the other hand, when the movable effect member 6360 is maintained in the standing state at the start of the round game R, it is a jackpot that shifts to the short-time state after the end of the jackpot game, or a jackpot that shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot ends. It is unknown.

  Therefore, when the movable effect member 6360 is in a tilted state at the start of the round game R, the player can be relieved (it is determined that the game will shift to the high probability state after the jackpot game is finished). At this time, in this embodiment, in the period of the round game R or the period before the round game R, the player is notified of “probable change !?” or the like (the player is made to understand the jackpot profit). Useful characters, diagrams, light display, and voice output) are executed by the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like (see FIG. 4). Thereby, a player can be relieved.

  Since the movable effect member 6360 starts operating earlier than the moving upper lid member 332 (see FIG. 54) as described above, the player moves the upper moving lid member 332 into an open state (retracted state), Before the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56 (a)) is opened, it can be confirmed whether or not to shift to the high probability state after the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if the movable effect member 6360 is tilted at the start of the round game R, the player cannot be relieved. When the movable performance member 6360 is maintained in the standing state at the start of the round game R, the jackpot f or the jackpot g is selected, but the jackpot has a clear difference in the profit that the player can obtain. is there.

  That is, the jackpot f is the jackpot of the maximum payout number, and after the jackpot game, from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot, the special symbol has a high probability state and the normal symbol (the second pattern) ) Is a jackpot that shifts to a state where it is easy for the ball to win a prize at the second winning opening 640 (many prize balls, jackpot for transition to a high probability state). On the other hand, the jackpot g is a jackpot of the minimum number of payouts, and after the jackpot game, it is a jackpot that is shifted to a short time state of the normal symbol until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times (the number of prize balls is low, low Jackpot of transition to probability state).

  For this reason, whether or not the acquired jackpot is the jackpot f or the jackpot g is the greatest attention for the player. In the present embodiment, by confirming the state of the movable effect member 6360, it is possible to determine whether the acquired jackpot is the jackpot f or the jackpot g, so that attention to the movable effect member 6360 is improved. Can do.

  That is, at the jackpot f, the movable effect member 6360 stands up immediately before the end of the round game R, while at the jackpot g, the movable effect member 6360 is maintained in a tilted state until the round game R ends. Therefore, the player can determine the jackpot type of the jackpot that has been acquired by viewing the state of the movable effect member 6360 until immediately before the end of the round game R.

  At this time, in the present embodiment, during the round game R, a message such as “Wait for change !? Wait for follow-up” and the like (characters, diagrams, Light display and sound output) are executed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like (see FIG. 4). Thereby, it is possible to produce a feeling of tension in the time until the determination of the jackpot type and to improve the interest of the player.

  The timing at which the movable effect member 6360 changes to the standing state is defined based on the timing at which a predetermined number (six in the seventh operation pattern) of game balls that have passed through the specific winning opening 65a is detected. Therefore, when the timing at which a predetermined number of gaming balls are detected and the timing at which a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of gaming balls are detected are short (number exceeding the difference between the predetermined number and the predetermined number). Since it is difficult to determine whether the change to the standing state of the movable effect member 6360 occurred immediately before the end of the round game R or the end of the round game R, It becomes difficult to determine the jackpot type.

  Such a situation occurs when a plurality of game balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a all at once. For this reason, it is possible to avoid such a situation by firing game balls one by one with a longer interval than usual.

  At this time, in the present embodiment, during the round game R, the player is informed of “probably changed! Characters, diagrams, light display and sound output useful for suggesting the method are executed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, the lamp display device 227, etc. (see FIG. 4). Thereby, it is possible to instruct the game ball firing mode during the time until the determination of the jackpot type, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult to determine the jackpot type.

  Even when a situation where it is difficult to determine the jackpot type occurs, if a plurality of game balls are won at a time in the specific winning opening 65a, a predetermined number of winnings or more will occur. There are many cases. That is, instead of making it difficult to determine the jackpot type, the player often obtains more prize balls than the prize ball scheduled for the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to balance the profits obtained by the player.

  As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when hitting the normal symbol is reached. It is set to be long (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second winning opening 640, the special symbol 2 is easily drawn. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, the special symbol probabilistic state is likely to become a big hit of the special symbol, and if the big win is likely to become a big hit e, f (a big hit of the maximum outgoing ball). Since it becomes easy to repeat, it becomes easy for a player to acquire a lot of prize balls. Thus, the game can be performed while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<About 9th operation pattern (non-V)>
FIG. 69 shows the moving upper lid member 332, solenoid 2333, movable effect member 6360, second clutch member 530, drive motor 510, sensor S, third sensor S3, restriction valves VB and V in the ninth operation pattern (non-V). It is the figure which showed the time change of the output of winning prize sensor VC. In the drawings of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, an ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball is detected. Further, the prescribed number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a indicates the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

  In this operation pattern, the V winning sensor VC is disposed downstream of the third sensor S3, and the regulating valve VB is disposed at a position upstream of the V winning sensor VC and downstream of the third sensor S3. .

  As will be described later, the ninth operation pattern is intended to constitute a case where a game ball can pass through the V prize sensor VC and a case where a game ball cannot pass through the V prize sensor VC. The operation mode in the round game R is determined to be the ninth operation pattern (non-V) described here or the ninth operation pattern (V) described later, depending on the type of jackpot. Under such circumstances, the drive motor 510 is controlled by the MPU 201 in the ninth operation pattern.

  If the MPU 201 (refer to FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts the control of the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure change display (design change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

  In the case of a predetermined jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the movable upper cover member 332 operates based on the ninth operation pattern (non-V), and the ninth operation pattern (non-V). Based on V), the MPU 201 drives and controls the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) so that the second clutch member 530 operates so that the movable effect member 6360 operates.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). And the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the movable upper cover member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to thereby receive the specific prize opening 65a ( The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open (see FIG. 56A), and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  At the same time, the MPU 201 drives the drive motor 510 so that the second clutch member 530 is in the initial posture before the opening time OP elapses, and the first clutch member 520 is in the contact start posture (FIG. 60A). The drive motor 510 is maintained in a state of being stopped at (see).

  With the start of the first round game R (excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333) as a trigger, the drive motor 510 is driven in the forward rotation direction until the second clutch member 530 changes to the end posture. When the second clutch member 530 is in the terminal posture, the movable effect member 6360 is in an upright state.

  At this time, the drive motor 510 is rotationally driven at a rotational speed at which the second clutch member 530 can reach the end posture before the movable upper cover member 332 starts operating from the extended state. Therefore, the movable effect member 6360 is brought into an upright state before the movable upper cover member 332 is in the open state (retracted state) and the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it can be set as the structure where the game ball which passed the specific winning opening 65a passes the sensor S exclusively.

  In the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced to the closed state (the extended state) and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. .

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means solenoid 2333 keeps the movable upper cover member 332 in the closed state (the extended state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R starts after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  In the ninth operation pattern (non-V), the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the first interval time Int1 between rounds is limited to the standing state by the drive control of the solenoid 2333 regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510. be able to.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the moving upper cover member 332 is changed from the closed state (extended state) to the open state ( The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be displaced to the retracted state to open the specific winning opening 65a, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (extension state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between each round game R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the movable upper cover member 332 is closed (the extended state) ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the round game R of the last round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means holds the moving upper cover member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. It is controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  In the ninth operation pattern (non-V), only the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the round game R in the first round is described, and the operation of the movable effect member 6360 in the round game R in the second and subsequent rounds. In the aspect, the ninth operation pattern (non-V) may be continued, or may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, the ninth operation pattern (non-V) may be adopted for the round game R in the predetermined round, and the round game R in the first round may be set to another operation pattern.

  In the ninth operation pattern, the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) is described as being controlled by the MPU 201. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be controlled by the MPU 221.

<Ninth operation pattern (V)>
Next, the ninth operation pattern (V) will be described. In the ninth operation pattern (V), the driving time of the drive motor 510 is longer than that in the ninth operation pattern (non-V), so that the movable upper cover member 332 is opened (retracted). ), The second clutch member 530 is in an initial posture, and the movable effect member 6360 is in a tilted state.

  FIG. 70 shows a moving upper lid member 332, a solenoid 2333, a movable effect member 6360, a second clutch member 530, a drive motor 510, a sensor S, a third sensor S3, a regulation valve VB and a V prize in the ninth operation pattern (V). It is the figure which showed the time change of the output of sensor VC. In the drawings of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, an ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball is detected. Further, the prescribed number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a indicates the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

  In this operation pattern, the V winning sensor VC is disposed downstream of the third sensor S3, and the regulating valve VB is disposed at a position upstream of the V winning sensor VC and downstream of the third sensor S3. .

  If the MPU 201 (refer to FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts the control of the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure change display (design change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

  In the case of a predetermined jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the movable upper cover member 332 operates based on the ninth operation pattern (V), and the ninth operation pattern (V). The MPU 201 controls the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) so that the second clutch member 530 operates so that the movable effect member 6360 operates based on the above.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). And the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the movable upper cover member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to thereby open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be opened, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  At the same time, the MPU 201 drives the drive motor 510 so that the second clutch member 530 is in the initial posture before the opening time OP elapses, and the first clutch member 520 is in the contact start posture (FIG. 60A). The drive motor 510 is maintained in a state of being stopped at (see).

  With the start of the first round game R (excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333) as a trigger, the drive motor 510 is driven in the forward rotation direction until the second clutch member 530 changes to the end posture. When the second clutch member 530 is in the terminal posture, the movable effect member 6360 is in an upright state.

  At this time, similarly to the above-described ninth operation pattern (non-V), the rotational speed at which the second clutch member 530 can reach the end posture before the movable upper cover member 332 starts operating from the extended state, While the drive motor 510 is rotationally driven, the drive motor 510 is driven for a long time unlike the ninth operation pattern (non-V) described above. As a result, the first clutch member 520 returns to the contact start posture (see FIG. 60A) through the release posture (see FIG. 60C), so that the second clutch member 530 returns to the initial posture. To do.

  Therefore, the movable effect member 6360 is in the standing state before the moving upper lid member 332 is in the open state (retracted state) and the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. It changes to a tilted state. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a can be configured to pass through the third sensor S3.

  In the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced to the closed state (the extended state) and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. .

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means solenoid 2333 keeps the movable upper cover member 332 in the closed state (the extended state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R starts after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  In the ninth operation pattern (V), the state of the movable effect member 6360 at the first interval time Int1 between rounds is limited to the standing state by the drive control of the solenoid 2333 regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510. Can do.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the moving upper cover member 332 is changed from the closed state (extended state) to the open state ( The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be displaced to the retracted state to open the specific winning opening 65a, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (extension state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between each round game R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the movable upper cover member 332 is closed (the extended state) ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the round game R of the last round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means holds the moving upper cover member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. It is controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  In the ninth operation pattern (V), only the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the first round game R is described, and the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the second and subsequent round games R. May continue the ninth operation pattern (V) or may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, the ninth operation pattern (V) may be adopted for the round game R in the predetermined round, and the round game R in the first round may be set as another operation pattern.

  In the pattern of this operation, the movable effect member 6360 is switched between allowing or restricting a game ball from entering a predetermined entrance (sensor S or third sensor S3) in the same manner as the moving upper cover member 332. It can be handled as a member.

  As another form, for example, when the movable effect member 6360 is in the standing state, the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a is detected only by the sensor S, while when the movable effect member 6360 is in the tilted state, it passes through the specific winning opening 65a. The game ball may be configured to be detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3 different from the sensor S (this can be realized by forming the recessed portion 2365 in the movable effect member 6360).

  In this case, in the round game R, it is possible to make a case where the game ball passes only the sensor S as in the present embodiment, and a case where the game ball passes the sensor S and the third sensor S3 unlike the present embodiment. . And by making it operate | move by this operation pattern, the switching of the control of the movable production | presentation member 6360 can switch whether the game ball can enter the V winning sensor VC.

  That is, in the ninth operation pattern (non-V), it is impossible to enter a game ball into the V winning sensor VC, and in the ninth operation pattern (V), it is possible to enter a game ball into the V winning sensor VC. It can be.

  In the present embodiment, only the game ball that has passed through the third sensor S3 has been described as passing through the V prize sensor VC. However, the game ball that has passed through the V prize sensor VC has been passed through the third sensor S3. The game ball is not limited to this, and may be a game ball that has passed the sensor S. In this case, an optimal operation for the movable effect member 6360 is set separately.

  In the ninth operation pattern, the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) is described as being controlled by the MPU 201. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be controlled by the MPU 221.

  Here, various methods are conventionally exemplified as a method of switching whether or not to enter the V winning sensor VC. For example, the flow path length from the opening / closing plate that opens and closes the specific prize opening to the V prize sensor VC is sufficient, and after the game ball enters the specific prize opening, the game ball reaches the V prize sensor VC. If the period of time is sufficiently long, even if the V-regulating valve VB that restricts the entry to the V winning sensor VC is operated after the opening / closing plate is opened, there is a possibility that an erroneous winning to the V winning sensor VC may occur. Is low.

  Therefore, in such a case, it is difficult to cause a problem by performing control to operate the V regulating valve VB after the opening / closing plate is opened. However, it is inevitable that the degree of freedom of the arrangement position of the V winning sensor VC decreases.

  On the other hand, even if the V winning sensor VC is arranged directly below the opening / closing plate, a method for preventing an erroneous winning to the V winning sensor VC by devising an operation pattern between the opening / closing plate and the V regulating valve VB is known. Yes. This is because, after the opening / closing plate is opened for a short time, the V regulating valve VB is operated while the opening / closing plate is closed to restrict the entry to the V winning sensor VC. The open / close plate is opened again in a state where the winning to the winning sensor VC is restricted, and the round game can be executed. In this case, since the opening / closing plate is closed at the timing when the V winning sensor VC is operated, it is possible to prevent the game ball from erroneously winning the V winning sensor VC.

  Therefore, in such a case, it is possible to prevent erroneous winning to the V winning sensor VC regardless of the distance between the specific winning opening and the V winning sensor VC, so that the position of the V winning sensor VC can be freely set. The degree can be increased. In other words, as long as it is downstream of the specific winning opening, the V winning sensor VC may be located anywhere (even if it is directly below, or a position after the game ball has flowed down for a while). However, since it is inevitable to open the opening / closing plate for a short time, the opening / closing plate cannot always be kept open during the round game R. Therefore, there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to understand the timing at which the game ball is fired, or that the player is suspected of being improperly controlled, which may cause distrust.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, using the fact that the operation start timing of the movable effect member 6360 is earlier than the operation start timing of the moving upper cover member 332, the moving upper cover member 332 is moved before it starts to move from the extended position. When the movable effect member 6360 is opened and closed (from the standing state to the tilted state and then returned to the standing state), as a result, the operation pattern that allows the third sensor S3 to enter the ball and the third sensor S3 to enter the ball. It is possible to switch between impossible operation patterns.

  In this case, as described above, the movable upper lid member 332 corresponding to the opening / closing plate can be always kept in the open state (retracted state) in the round game R, and in addition, the arrangement of the third sensor S3 is free. (In this embodiment, it is arranged directly behind the specific winning opening 65a).

  That is, it is possible to achieve both maintaining a high degree of freedom in arrangement of the V winning sensor VC and maintaining the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening in the open state in the round game R.

<Another example of the ninth operation pattern (V)>
Next, another example of the ninth operation pattern (V) will be described. Note that another example of the ninth operation pattern (V) is that the movable effect member 6360 does not return to the standing state immediately after the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333, as compared to the ninth operation pattern (V) described above. That is different.

  FIG. 71 shows a moving upper lid member 332, a solenoid 2333, a movable effect member 6360, a second clutch member 530, a drive motor 510, a sensor S, a third sensor S3, and a regulating valve VB in another example of the ninth operation pattern (V). It is the figure which showed the time change of the output of V prize sensor VC. In the drawings of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, an ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball is detected. Further, the prescribed number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a indicates the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

  In this operation pattern, the V winning sensor VC is disposed downstream of the third sensor S3, and the regulating valve VB is disposed at a position upstream of the V winning sensor VC and downstream of the third sensor S3. .

  If the MPU 201 (refer to FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts the control of the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure change display (design change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

  In the case of a predetermined jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the movable upper cover member 332 operates based on another example of the ninth operation pattern (V). Based on another example of (V), the MPU 201 drives and controls the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) so that the second clutch member 530 operates so that the movable effect member 6360 operates.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). And the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the movable upper cover member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to thereby open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be opened, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  At the same time, the MPU 201 drives the drive motor 510 so that the second clutch member 530 is in the initial posture before the opening time OP elapses, and the first clutch member 520 is in the contact start posture (FIG. 60A). The drive motor 510 is maintained in a state of being stopped at (see).

  Even after the first round game R is started, the drive motor 510 is controlled to stop, and the second clutch member 530 is maintained in the initial posture. Therefore, the movable effect member 6360 is tilted with the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333.

  As described above, the movable effect member 6360 moves toward the tilted state before the movable upper cover member 332 operates toward the open state (retracted state) and the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. To do. Therefore, it can be set as the structure where the game ball which passed the specific winning opening 65a passes exclusively 3rd sensor S3.

  In the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced to the closed state (the extended state) and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. .

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means solenoid 2333 keeps the movable upper cover member 332 in the closed state (the extended state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R starts after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  In another example of the ninth operation pattern (V), the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the first interval time Int1 between rounds is raised by the drive control of the solenoid 2333 regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510. It can be limited.

  In the second round, as with the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the moving upper cover member 332 is changed from the closed state (extended state) to the open state ( The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be displaced to the retracted state to open the specific winning opening 65a, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (extension state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between each round game R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the movable upper cover member 332 is closed (the extended state) ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the round game R of the last round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means holds the moving upper cover member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. It is controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  In the other example of the ninth operation pattern (V), only the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the round game R in the first round is described, and the movable effect member 6360 in the round game R in the second and subsequent rounds. This operation mode may be continued with another example of the ninth operation pattern (V) or may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, another example of the ninth operation pattern (V) may be adopted for the round game R in the predetermined round, and the round game R in the first round may be set as another operation pattern.

<Tenth operation pattern (lower passage)>
72 shows the moving upper lid member 332, solenoid 2333, movable effect member 6360, second clutch member 530, drive motor 510, sensor S, third sensor S3, restriction valves VB and V in the tenth operation pattern (lower passage). It is the figure which showed the time change of the output of winning prize sensor VC. In the drawings of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, an ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball is detected. Further, the prescribed number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a indicates the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

  In this operation pattern, the V winning sensor VC is disposed downstream of the third sensor S3, and the regulating valve VB is disposed at a position upstream of the V winning sensor VC and downstream of the third sensor S3. . The opening timing of the restriction valve VB is limited to a predetermined time (2 seconds in this operation pattern) from the start of the first round game R.

  If the MPU 201 (refer to FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts the control of the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure change display (design change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

  In the case of a predetermined jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the movable upper lid member 332 operates based on the tenth operation pattern (lower passage). In the tenth operation pattern (passing downward), unlike each operation pattern described above, the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) is controlled by the MPU 201 so as to continue the constant operation after the power is turned on. The constant operation in the tenth operation pattern (lower passage) is set to a constant speed operation that pre-rotates at a rotation speed of 10 [degrees / second].

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). And the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the second operating time T1 (maximum 1 second) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the movable upper cover member 332 is displaced from the closed state (the extended state) to the open state (the retracted state) to thereby open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be opened, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball can roll on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332, and as described above, a state in which the game ball is always on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 can be configured. Even when the operation time T1 is as short as 1 second at the maximum, it is possible to easily make the game ball enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  Here, while the operation timing of the moving upper lid member 332 depends on the start timing of the jackpot game, the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) continues a certain operation after the power is turned on. The posture of the second clutch member 530 at the time does not always match, but differs depending on the start timing of the jackpot game.

  The tenth operation pattern (lower passage) is described as an operation pattern when the second clutch member 530 is in the terminal posture when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the open state (retracted state). As shown in FIG. 72, in the tenth operation pattern (lower passage), the movable effect member 6360 is maintained in the standing state when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the open state (retracted state). Therefore, since the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a in the first round game R is detected by the sensor S, it is not detected by the V winning sensor VC.

  Then, in the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (1 second which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) has elapsed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced to the closed state (the extended state) and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. .

  Since the second operation time T2 is sufficiently shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls to enter the specific winning opening 65a, the round game R in the first round is exclusively round game time. The process ends when the second operation time T2 is maximum (1 second).

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means solenoid 2333 keeps the movable upper cover member 332 in the closed state (the extended state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R starts after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  In the tenth operation pattern (passing downward), the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the first interval time Int1 between rounds is limited to the standing state by the drive control of the solenoid 2333 regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510. be able to.

  In the second round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the movable upper cover member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to receive a specific prize. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to open the opening 65a, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (extension state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated in the same manner as the round game R of the second round with the first interval time Int1 between rounds between the round games R, and moves. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so that the upper lid member 332 is displaced between a closed state (extended state) and an open state (retracted state), and opens and closes the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the round game R of the last round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means holds the moving upper cover member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. It is controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  In the tenth operation pattern (passing down), only the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the round game R in the first round is mainly described, and the movable effect member 6360 in the round game R in the second and subsequent rounds. In the operation mode, the tenth operation pattern (lower passage) may be continued, or may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, the tenth operation pattern (passing down) may be adopted for the round game R in the predetermined round, and the round game R in the first round may be set as another operation pattern.

  For example, if the 10th operation pattern (passing down) is adopted for the round game R of the second round and the control valve VB is controlled to be opened at the start timing of the round game R of the second round, The posture of the second clutch member 530 during the round game R of the second round is determined not only by the start timing but also by how many seconds the round game R of the first round is consumed. Accordingly, since the strategy for digesting the jackpot game can be improved, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from becoming slow.

<10th operation pattern (up passage)>
FIG. 73 shows a moving upper lid member 332, a solenoid 2333, a movable effect member 6360, a second clutch member 530, a drive motor 510, a sensor S, a third sensor S3, and regulating valves VB and V in the tenth operation pattern (up passage). It is the figure which showed the time change of the output of winning prize sensor VC. In the drawings of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, an ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball is detected. Further, the prescribed number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a indicates the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

  In this operation pattern, the V winning sensor VC is disposed downstream of the third sensor S3, and the regulating valve VB is disposed at a position upstream of the V winning sensor VC and downstream of the third sensor S3. . The opening timing of the restriction valve VB is limited to a predetermined time (2 seconds in this operation pattern) from the start of the first round game R.

  If the MPU 201 (refer to FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts the control of the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure change display (design change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

  In the case of a predetermined jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the movable upper lid member 332 operates based on the tenth operation pattern (up passage). In the tenth operation pattern (upper passage), similarly to the tenth operation pattern (lower passage) described above, the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) causes the MPU 221 to continue the constant operation after the power is turned on. Controlled. The constant operation in the tenth operation pattern (upper passage) is set to a constant speed operation that pre-rotates at a rotational speed of 10 [degrees / second], similarly to the tenth operation pattern (lower passage).

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). And the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the second operating time T1 (maximum 1 second) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the movable upper cover member 332 is displaced from the closed state (the extended state) to the open state (the retracted state) to thereby open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to be opened, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball can roll on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332, and the game ball can always be on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 as described above. Even when the operation time T1 is as short as 1 second at the maximum, it is possible to easily make the game ball enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  Here, while the operation timing of the moving upper lid member 332 depends on the start timing of the jackpot game, the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) continues a certain operation after the power is turned on. The posture of the second clutch member 530 at the time does not always match, but differs depending on the start timing of the jackpot game.

  The tenth operation pattern (upper passage) is described as an operation pattern when the second clutch member 530 is in the initial posture when the movable upper cover member 332 is in the open state (retracted state). As shown in FIG. 73, in the tenth operation pattern (upper passage), the movable effect member 6360 is tilted when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the open state (retracted state). Accordingly, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a in the first round game R is detected by the third sensor S3 and can be detected by the V winning sensor VC.

  Then, in the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (1 second which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) has elapsed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced to the closed state (the extended state) and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. .

  Since the second operation time T2 is sufficiently shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls to enter the specific winning opening 65a, the round game R in the first round is exclusively round game time. The process ends when the second operation time T2 is maximum (1 second).

  When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means solenoid 2333 keeps the movable upper cover member 332 in the closed state (the extended state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R starts after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  In the tenth operation pattern (upward passage), the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the first interval time Int1 between rounds is limited to the standing state by the drive control of the solenoid 2333 regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510. be able to.

  In the second round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the movable upper cover member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to receive a specific prize. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to open the opening 65a, and the moving upper lid member 332 is operated for a long time.

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (extension state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated in the same manner as the round game R of the second round with the first interval time Int1 between rounds between the round games R, and moves. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so that the upper lid member 332 is displaced between a closed state (extended state) and an open state (retracted state), and opens and closes the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the round game R of the last round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means holds the moving upper cover member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. It is controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  In the tenth operation pattern (upward passage), only the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the round game R in the first round is mainly described, and the movable effect member 6360 in the round game R in the second and subsequent rounds. In the operation mode, the tenth operation pattern (upward passage) may be continued, or may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, the tenth operation pattern (passing up) may be adopted for the round game R in the predetermined round, and the round game R in the first round may be set as another operation pattern.

  For example, if the tenth operation pattern (upward passage) is adopted for the round game R of the second round and the control valve VB is controlled to be opened at the start timing of the round game R of the second round, The posture of the second clutch member 530 during the round game R of the second round is determined not only by the start timing but also by how many seconds the round game R of the first round is consumed. Accordingly, since the strategy for digesting the jackpot game can be improved, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from becoming slow.

  According to the tenth operation pattern, it is possible to make a case where the game ball passes only the sensor S and a case where only the third sensor S3 passes in the first round game R. Only the game ball that has passed the third sensor S3 in the first round game R is configured to be able to pass the V winning sensor VC described above, so that the movable effect member 6360 in the first round game R is provided. And whether or not a game ball can enter the V prize sensor VC can be switched.

  That is, in the tenth operation pattern (passing down), it is impossible to enter the game ball into the V winning sensor VC, and in the tenth operation pattern (up passing), the game ball is entering into the V winning sensor VC. Can be possible.

  Further, the moving upper cover member 332 is moved at a timing other than the tenth operation pattern (lower passage) and the tenth operation pattern (upper passage) (for example, timing when the second clutch member 530 is changed from the initial posture to the terminal posture). When the state changes to the open state (retracted state), it is possible to leave the possibility that the game ball passes the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

  In the tenth operation pattern, the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) is described as being controlled by the MPU 201. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled by the MPU 221.

  In the above description, the game ball that has passed through the third sensor S3 has been described as passing through the V winning sensor VC. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game ball that passes through the V winning sensor VC is not limited to the game ball that passes through the third sensor S3, and may be a game ball that passes through the sensor S.

  Further, the mode of the constant operation of the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) may be set separately corresponding to the operation desired to be performed by the movable effect member 6360.

  For example, the operation of the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) after the power is turned on is performed by changing the first clutch member 520 from the contact start posture (see FIG. 60 (a)) to the contact end posture (FIG. 60 (b)). Rotate in the forward rotation direction so as to instantaneously change until the reference), and then stop for a predetermined period, and then the first clutch member 520 is released to the next contact start posture through the release posture (see FIG. 60C). It may be controlled as a constant operation that repeats rotating in the forward rotation direction so as to change instantaneously and then stopping for a predetermined period.

  In this case, since the time required for the second clutch member 530 to change from the initial posture to the final posture can be extremely shortened, the game ball passes through the specific winning opening 65a during the movement of the second clutch member 530. It is possible to make the possibility of occurrence extremely low. Therefore, the possibility that a situation in which the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a can enter both the sensor S and the third sensor S3 can be extremely reduced.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73, it is the second clutch member 530 that operates in a constant manner, not the movable effect member 6360. In other words, the movable effect member 6360 is a member that changes its state in accordance with the operation of the second clutch member 530 that operates in a constant manner, but the second clutch member 530 is in a state where the solenoid 2333 is not excited (driven). Maintain the standing state regardless of the posture.

  Since the second clutch member 530 is disposed below the inner rail 61, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the game during the game. Therefore, when the player wants to grasp the operation mode of the second clutch member 530, the player pays attention to the state of the movable effect member 6360 that is easily visible during the game. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the movable effect member 6360 is maintained in the closed state, even if attention is paid to the movable effect member 6360, the operation mode of the second clutch member 530 cannot be grasped ( It is not possible to know which timing corresponds to a certain operation).

  Therefore, a situation in which a game mode that gives an unexpected profit to a player can be executed by grasping the mode of movement of a movable member that performs a fixed motion and adjusting the timing of ball launch (establishing a strategy) Can be easily avoided.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the moving upper lid member 332 of the panel surface lower unit 300 slides in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a long plate-like movable member that is pivotally supported on the inner side surfaces of the pair of stepped portions 324a and is formed in a pair of left and right is provided, and the movable member is in a direction in which the pair of stepped portions 324a are connected. Is placed in a posture along the longitudinal direction to prevent the passage of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, and the opening is swung upward or downward from that state to allow the passage of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a. The state may be formed. Moreover, you may comprise the 2nd winning opening 640 instead of the specific winning opening 65a by the same structure.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 331c is reflected to the front side when the movable upper lid member 332 of the panel surface lower unit 300 is in the retracted state has been described. It is not a thing. For example, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the extended state, a portion that reflects light emitted from the light irradiation device 331c to the front side may be formed in the lower portion of the moving upper lid member 332. In this case, the light reflected by the moving upper lid member 332 is not blocked by the sphere, and the light effect can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, the movable upper lid members 332 and 4332 have been described as members that slide in the front-rear direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the left and right end portions may be pivotally supported so as to be displaced so as to open and close the fan. In this case, even when the game ball is sandwiched between the glass unit 16 during the displacement, the game ball can escape in a direction parallel to the surface of the glass unit 16.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the timing of starting the operation of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 is deviated has been described. For example, it is good also as a structure where the timing of an operation | movement start with the movement upper cover member 332 and the movable production | presentation member 2360 becomes simultaneous. Examples of the realization method include a method of changing the tip shape of the extending rod-like portion 2353 and adjusting the drive timing of the drive motor 510.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the movable effect member 2360 that is rotationally displaced is arranged on the upstream side of the specific winning opening 65a, and the movable upper lid member 332 that is slidably displaced along a predetermined plane is arranged on the further upstream side. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation mode of the movable upper cover member 332 and the operation mode of the movable effect member 2360 may be the same system, or the operation modes may be reversed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the movable effect member 2360 is disposed on the downstream side of the movable upper cover member 332 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an effect member that is operated by a drive device (solenoid 2333) that operates the moving upper cover member 332 as in the case of the movable effect member 2360 may be disposed on the upstream side of the moving upper cover member 332, or may be disposed outside the game area. May be provided.

  In this case, for example, by operating the effect member, it may be aimed to approach (enter) the area that the player is paying attention to (for example, the display area of the third symbol display device 81). In this case, even when the player is not paying attention to the effect member and paying attention to another area (for example, the display area of the third symbol display device 81), the operation timing of the moving upper lid member 332 is determined by the player. Can be noticed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the movable upper lid member 332 is configured as a member that opens and closes the specific winning opening 65a, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the movable upper cover member 332 may be configured as a member that opens and closes the second winning opening 640. That is, the second winning opening 640 may be arranged at the position of the sensor S.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the movable effect members 2360 to 6360 have been described as being easier to identify the difference in shape before and after the operation than the movable upper lid members 332 and 4332, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the movable upper cover members 332 and 4332 and the movable effect members 2360 to 6360 may be configured with the same shape and the same operation, and may be different in pleasure. In this case, it is possible to easily improve the distinguishability of the state of the movable effect members 2360 to 6360 by attaching a reflective sticker that reflects light to the movable effect members 2360 to 6360 or disposing the LEDs.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the movable effect member 2360 and the movable upper lid member 332 are arranged in such an arrangement that the game ball bounced on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 can collide with the movable upper lid member 332 has been described. It is not limited to. For example, the game ball may not collide with the space between the movable effect member 2360 and the moving upper lid member 332 sufficiently apart. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball biting from occurring between the movable upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 2360.

  In each of the above embodiments, the movable effect members 2360, 3360, 4360, and 6360 are formed in a planar shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, protrusions and ribs may be formed on the front and back surfaces of the movable effect members 2360, 3360, 4360, and 6360 at sizes and intervals that affect the flow of the game ball. Thereby, the randomness of the flow-down mode of the game ball flowing down with the surfaces of the movable effect members 2360, 3360, 4360, and 6360 abutting on the flow-down can be increased. This surface is not limited to the surface disposed below the game ball, but may be a surface disposed in the horizontal direction or a surface disposed above. Further, the above-described protrusions and ribs may be formed on the upper surface of the inner rail 61, or may be formed on the rear surfaces of the front plate members 320 and 2320.

  Although description of LED was abbreviate | omitted in the said 2nd Embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, you may arrange | position LED similarly to 1st Embodiment. In this case, the game ball that entered the specific winning opening 65a at the closing timing of the movable upper lid member 332 passes through the front side of the movable effect member 2360 and passes back and forth through the lower passage 331b, thereby blocking the light and changing the light emission mode. Therefore, the meaning of notifying the possibility that a game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a at the closing timing of the movable upper lid member 332 can be added to the change in the light emission mode.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the front surface and the back surface of the movable effect member 2360 are configured in a planar shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the flow path of the game ball may be adjusted by providing the surface of the movable effect member 2360 or a rib extending vertically from the surface.

  In this case, for example, by forming the extension length of the rib extending from the flow surface of the game ball to be shorter than the radius of the game ball, the rib can be configured as a portion over which the game ball can get over. . Therefore, it is possible to make a difference in the flow mode (speed) between the game ball after overcoming the rib and the game ball before overcoming the rib.

  Further, for example, by forming the extension length of the rib extending from the flow surface of the game ball to be longer than the radius of the game ball, the flow path of the game ball can be defined by the rib. For example, it is possible to avoid a collision between a game ball flowing down a position facing one surface of the rib and a game ball flowing down a position facing the other surface of the rib.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the second sensor S2 and the V winning sensor VC are disposed at the left side of the specific winning opening 65a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the second sensor S2 and the V winning sensor VC may be arranged in a pair symmetrically. In this case, the probability that the game ball passes through the V prize sensor VC depends on whether the game ball is inserted into the specific prize opening 65a from the left or right by changing the operation mode of the regulating valve VB that opens and closes the V prize sensor VC. Can be changed.

  In this case, it is configured so that one of the game balls entering from either the left or right side always passes the V winning sensor VC, so that the player can change the shooting mode to switch between left-handed and right-handed in the middle of the round game R. Can be easily performed. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from having spare time during the round game R.

  In addition, it is possible to improve the attention of notification indicating which is advantageous, and to improve the player's concentration.

  In the said 3rd Embodiment, although the movable production | presentation member 3360 demonstrated the case where the upper surface of the main-body board part 2361 was formed from planar shape, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the upper surface of the front half of the main body plate portion 2361 may be inclined downward from the left and right center toward the left and right outer direction, and the upper surface of the rear half may be inclined downward toward the left and right center. In this case, the game ball riding on the upper surface of the movable effect member 3360 can be made easy to flow toward the second sensor S2, and after the game ball is stopped at the second sensor S2, the game ball is moved to the recessed portion 2365. It is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball toward the sensor S through the inclination (inclination toward the left and right center).

  In the fourth embodiment, the case where the locked portion 4367 applies a load along the vertical direction to the protruding claw portion 4433a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the locked portion 4367 may be formed in a shape that applies a load in the horizontal direction to the protruding claw portion 4433a. In this case, since the load applied to the up / down moving member 4430 from the locked portion 4367 is directed in the horizontal direction, the up / down moving member 4430 is caused by the load applied from the locked portion 4367 to the up / down moving member 4430. It can be prevented from being moved up and down. Therefore, even when the biasing force of the coil spring SP4b is weak, the vertical movement member 4430 can be maintained at the lower limit position.

  In the fourth embodiment, after the movable upper lid member 4332 is in the closed state (the overhanging state), the movable effect member 4360 is changed to the standing state, and the game ball stopped inside the second sensor S2 is V. Although the case of flowing down to the winning sensor VC has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by adopting the load generating device 500 instead of the switching device 4400, the movable effect member 4360 is changed to the standing state while the movable upper lid member 4332 is maintained in the open state (retracted state), and the V winning sensor VC A game ball can be entered.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the movable upper cover member 4332 is in the open state (retracted state), the movable effect member 4360 maintains the standing state, and when the movable upper cover member 4332 is in the open state (retracted state). Although the case where the movable effect member 4360 is alternately switched to the tilted state has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by configuring the main body portion 4411 of the rotating member 4410 so as to include the equally recessed portions 4411a at a cycle of 45 degrees (eight locations), the movable upper cover member 4332 changes to the open state (retracted state) four times. In addition, the movable effect member 4360 is tilted when the movable upper lid member 4332 is in the open state (retracted state), and otherwise, the movable effect member 4360 can be maintained in the standing state.

  Note that the above-described change of the moving upper lid member 4332 a plurality of times may be executed (completed) during the same round game R or may occur over a plurality of round games R. In the latter case, the round game R in which the movable effect member 4360 is tilted (one time) and the round game R in which the movable effect member 4360 is in the standing state (three times) are executed periodically (in a four-round cycle). be able to.

  Similarly, by omitting one of the load generating portions 4413, the movable upper lid member 4332 is brought into the open state (retracted state) each time the movable upper lid member 4332 changes to the open state (retracted state) four times. When this occurs, the movable effect member 4360 is tilted, and otherwise, the movable effect member 4360 can be maintained in an upright state.

  In the fourth embodiment, the case where the up / down moving member 4430 maintains the movable effect member 4360 in an upright state and the tilt start timing of the up / down moving member 4430 is delayed from the movement start timing of the moving upper lid member 4332 has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the timing at which the vertically moving member 4430 is arranged at the upper limit position is advanced so that the timing at which the movable effect member 4360 starts to tilt is equal to or earlier than the timing at which the moving upper lid member 4332 starts to move. May be. As a means for advancing the timing, there is exemplified a method in which the lower surface of the vertically moving member 4430 is bulged downward at a position on the back side with respect to the recessed portion 4431a so as to be pushed up early by the load generating portion 4413. Is done. The tilt start timing of the movable effect member 4360 can be arbitrarily designed by designing the portion to be bulged.

  In the fourth embodiment described above, the case where the entrance monitoring sensor S0 is used as a sensor not related to the payout of the winning ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may comprise as a sensor which produces | generates a prize ball in connection with detecting the passage of a ball | bowl. In this case, as compared with the case where the sensor S detects the passing of the ball and generates the payout of the prize ball, the timing at which the payout of the prize ball occurs can be advanced. In addition, it is naturally allowed to arrange the entrance monitoring sensor S0 in other embodiments.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the lower surface raising member 5440 is maintained at the retracted position (maintained in the reverse rotation posture) by the urging force of the coil spring SP5a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the position of the center of gravity of the lower surface raising member 5440 may be disposed closer to the contact portion 5442 than the rotation axis. In this case, the lower surface raising member 5440 can be maintained at the retracted position by its own weight (can be maintained in the reverse posture).

  In each operation pattern of the sixth embodiment, the case where the drive motor 510 is controlled by the MPU 221 and the case where the drive motor 510 is controlled by the MPU 201 have been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the drive motor 510 may be controlled by the MPU 201 instead of being controlled by the MPU 221, or the drive motor 510 may be controlled by the MPU 221 instead of being controlled by the MPU 201.

  Although the case where the recessed portion 2365 is not formed in the movable effect member 6360 has been described in the sixth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the recessed portion 2365 may be formed in the movable effect member 6360. In this case, the game ball can flow toward the sensor S regardless of the state of the movable effect member 6360.

  In the sixth embodiment, the sensor S and the third sensor S3 to which the game balls are distributed according to the state of the movable effect member 6360 have been described as winning balls for winning a prize ball, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the function of the V winning sensor VC may be added to either the sensor S or the third sensor S3 in addition to or instead of the function as a winning opening for paying out a winning ball. In this case, the movable effect member 6360 can function as the regulating valve VB of the V winning sensor VC.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the movable effect member 6360 is maintained in the standing state in response to the moving upper lid member 332 being in the closed state (the overhanging state) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. No. For example, the lower surface raising member 5440 may be disposed so as to be driven by another driving device. In this case, when the lower surface raising member 5440 is in the extended position, the driving force of the solenoid 2333 is not transmitted to the movable effect member 6360 even when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the closed state (the extended state). It is possible to prevent the movable effect member 6360 from standing. Therefore, when the movable upper cover member 332 is in the closed state (the extended state), the movable effect member 6360 can be arbitrarily operated by rotating the drive motor 510.

  In this case, when the lower surface raising member 5440 is in the extended position, a driving device (solenoid 2333) that generates a driving force for the movable upper lid member 332 and a driving device that generates a driving force for the movable effect member 6360. (Drive motor 510) can be separated. That is, the movable effect member 6360 can be independently driven regardless of the state of the moving upper lid member 332.

  On the other hand, when the lower surface raising member 5440 is in the retracted position, the solenoid 2333 functions as a driving device that transmits driving force to both the movable upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360.

  Accordingly, due to the arrangement of the lower surface raising member 5440, the movement of the movable upper lid member 332 and the movement of the movable effect member 6360 are caused only by the driving force generated from another driving device, and the operation of the movable upper cover member 332 and the movable effect member. It is possible to switch between the case where the operation 6360 is also caused by the driving force generated from the dual-purpose driving device (solenoid 2333).

  In the sixth operation pattern of the sixth embodiment, the case where the movable effect member 6360 is changed to the standing state by the number of game balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, instead of the number of balls entered, the movable effect member 6360 may change to a standing state when a predetermined time elapses after the movable upper lid member 332 is in the open state. In this case, the same effect can be obtained by setting the predetermined time as the time for an average of six game balls to enter the specific winning opening 65a when the predetermined time is continuously fired at an interval controlled as the game ball launch interval. be able to. In addition, by setting the predetermined time to be longer (for example, 15 seconds), the round time can be maintained longer, so that the progress speed of the jackpot game can be delayed.

  Here, by checking the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the round game R, it is configured to be able to grasp the game state after the jackpot game is finished, whether the game state after the jackpot game is the probability change state, If you don't need to know if it will be in a normal state, you can end the jackpot game (Round Game R) with haste. It is also possible to add a gameability that requires execution over time.

  In other words, if it is more important to receive a lottery after the jackpot game sooner than knowing the gaming state after the jackpot game, there is an advantage that the jackpot game can be ended early, and the probability is changed. Since it is unknown whether it is normal or normal, there is a disadvantage that it is difficult to know when to quit. On the other hand, when it is desired to know whether the game state after the jackpot game is a probable change state or a normal state, there is a disadvantage that the lottery after the jackpot game ends is delayed, and there is an advantage that it is quitted when it is desired to quit. That is, the player can decide the points that he / she attaches importance to, and can select the profit (whether to take an early lottery or grasp the game state after the jackpot game) to be obtained by the jackpot game.

  In the sixth operation pattern of the sixth embodiment, the case where the movable effect member 6360 is operated according to the number of game balls that have passed through the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by using a mechanism that distributes a predetermined number of game balls to different paths, a predetermined number of game balls may be caused to flow through a path that acts on the movable effect member 6360, and the movable effect member 6360 may be operated by the action of the game ball. good.

  Although the tenth operation pattern of the sixth embodiment has been described as the operation pattern in the jackpot game, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, you may employ | adopt as the operation | movement pattern in a small hit game. In this case, it can be adopted as a V prize winner in a so-called “1 type 2 type mixer”.

  In the sixth operation pattern of the sixth embodiment, the case where the movable effect member 6360 is changed to the standing state by detecting four game balls less than the specified number has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Not. For example, the movable effect member 6360 may be controlled to change to the standing state by detecting one game ball less than the specified number. In this case, the last one ball or the over winning ball can be passed through the front side of the movable effect member 6360. Therefore, by visually recognizing the flow of the game balls entering the specific winning opening 65a through the path C2a, it is noticed that an over winning (the winning of the ball exceeding the number of the winnings planned) has occurred. That is, if a plurality of balls pass through the front side of the movable effect member 6360, it means that an over prize has occurred.

  In addition, the game ball that flows down the front side of the movable effect member 2360 in the standing state and then flows back and forth in the vicinity of the center position in the left and right direction becomes the game ball related to the over winning, so the game that flows down the other route Compared to a ball (a game ball that is not related to an over-winning game), the staying time for the game ball to stay on the front side of the specific winning port 65a can be lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball related to over winning, and the effect of the game ball related to over winning can be improved.

  Thereby, when an overwinning occurs, it is possible to make the player determine the presence or absence of the overwinning by confirming the flow-down mode of the game ball without notifying by voice or display. In other words, a special meaning can be added to the flow-down mode of the game ball. In this case, attention to the flow-down mode of the game ball can be improved, and the player can be prevented from playing in a distracted state, and the player can be concentrated on the game.

  In the sixth embodiment, the movable effect member 6360 has been described as not a member that opens and closes the specific winning opening 65a, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the movable effect member 6360 may be configured as a member that opens and closes the specific winning opening 65a. In this case, the movable sensor member 6360 can be configured as a member that opens and closes the specific winning port 65a by configuring the third sensor S3 as a large winning port for paying out a winning ball and configuring the sensor S as an out port.

  In this case, the movable upper lid member 332 can be configured in the same manner as in the present embodiment, and for example, the configuration may be omitted, and the upper surface of the movable upper lid member 332 from the left and right ends of the movable upper lid member 332 toward the left and right outer directions. A lateral sensor that is opened laterally so that a game ball that rolls along can be entered, and the upper surface of the movable upper cover member 332 rolls when the movable upper cover member 332 is in an overhanging state to You may comprise so that the game ball which passed may be able to enter into the horizontal sensor. When the latter configuration is adopted, since the overhanging state is the open state of the movable upper lid member 332, it is preferable that the operation direction of the solenoid 2333 by excitation (driving) is reversed upside down.

  In the sixth embodiment, it has been described that the drive motor 510 is driven in accordance with the operation timing of the movable upper lid member 332. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the board lower unit 6300 includes the lower surface raising member 5440 of the fifth embodiment and the operation timing of the movable upper cover member 332 is not reached (for example, when the game state is not shifted to the big hit game or the small hit game). When the design for a specific performance is stopped), the lower surface raising member 5440 is driven by a predetermined driving device so as to be arranged at the extended position, and has the same operation mode as any of the above-described operation patterns. An effect operation for driving the drive motor 510 may be performed.

  In this case, while the movable upper cover member 332 maintains the closed state, the movable effect member 6360 operates in the same manner as in the big hit game or the small hit game, so that the player is as if the big hit game or the small hit game. Can be produced to start. On the other hand, at this time, since the moving upper lid member 332 is maintained in the closed state (the extended state), an unnecessary prize ball is generated as compared with the case where the moving upper lid member 332 is actually operated to be opened shortly. Can be prevented.

  It should be noted that the above-mentioned effect operation is performed from the time when the jackpot game is started to immediately before the jackpot game is started, or after it is determined that the jackpot game is started, It may be performed immediately before the start of the event, or may be performed when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost. In this case, by paying attention to the movable effect member 6360, the timing at which the big hit game or the small hit game is started can be easily predicted. In addition, by associating each operation of the movable effect member 6360 with a small hit game or a big hit game, the player who has a higher experience value wins the game that is started thereafter from the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360. It is possible to easily determine whether the game is a small hit game or not. Thereby, the privilege for performing a game a plurality of times can be given, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<An example of the technical idea that the driven means increases the discriminability of the opening / closing plate>
A launching device that launches a game ball toward the game area, passing means configured to allow the game ball to pass, an open position where the game ball can pass through the passing means, and the game ball cannot pass through the passing means A gaming machine comprising: an opening / closing means that is displaced between closed positions; and a driving means that drives the opening / closing means, and a driven means that is driven in response to the displacement of the opening / closing means. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the means is configured so that the state change can be easily identified as compared with the opening / closing means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that complicates the production by opening and closing means for opening and closing a winning opening made up of a plurality of opening and closing plates (see, for example, JP 2010-220731 A). . However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the plurality of opening and closing plates are arranged with the intention of making it difficult to understand whether the winning opening is in the closed state or in the open state. There is a problem in that it is difficult to improve the attention of the player even if it is produced as a sheet.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the driven means is easily configured to identify the state change as compared with the opening and closing means, the position of the opening and closing means is difficult to understand from the viewpoint of the player from the operation mode of the opening and closing means. Even in this case, it is possible to easily play a game using the state of the driven means as a guide.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a case where identification of a state change becomes easy. For example, it is possible to make the identification easy by configuring the shape to change with respect to what does not change in the player's view even if the position changes, or by making the large shape with respect to the small one It may be easy.

  In the gaming machine A1, the driven means can transmit the driving force through a transmission path different from the transmission path through which the driving force is transmitted to the opening / closing means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that complicates the production by opening and closing means for opening and closing a winning opening made up of a plurality of opening and closing plates (see, for example, JP 2010-220731 A). . However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the driving force is transmitted to the opening / closing plate through a transmission path overlapping with the transmission path for transmitting the driving force to the effect opening / closing plate, one opening / closing plate is provided. The load applied from the game ball or the like is transmitted to the other opening / closing plate, and the durability of both the opening / closing plates may be lower than when both the opening / closing plates are separated. There was a problem.

  Further, in this case, it is necessary to provide a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force from the midway position of the transmission path for transmitting the driving force to one of the opening / closing plates toward the other opening / closing plate. There has been a problem that the degree of freedom of arrangement and the degree of freedom of operation mode are low.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the transmission path for transmitting the driving force to the opening / closing means and the transmission path for transmitting the driving force to the driven means are configured separately. Since this is possible, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the opening / closing means from being transmitted to the driven means.

  In addition, there is no need to connect the transmission path for transmitting the driving force to the opening / closing means and the transmission path for transmitting the driving force to the driven means, so that the opening / closing means and the driven means can be freely arranged. The degree of freedom and the degree of freedom of operation can be improved.

  Here, “driven in response to the displacement of the opening / closing means” means that the opening / closing means and the driven means are in an associated operation, and the opening / closing means is not necessarily in the open position or the closed position. Therefore, it does not require that the state of the driven means be the same every time.

  For example, even if the driven means is in the first state when the opening and closing means is in the open position, and the driven means is in the second state when the opening and closing means is in the open position next time, Thereafter, if the driven means is periodically set to the first state, it is recognized that “they are driven correspondingly”.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the driven means is disposed downstream of the opening / closing means, and is driven before the opening / closing means starts displacement from the closed position toward the open position. Game machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, it is possible to predict the timing at which the opening / closing means is opened before the opening / closing means is opened. Therefore, it is possible to easily measure the timing of launching the game ball aiming at the passing means.

  When the opening / closing means starts to move from the closed position to the open position, the driven means may be driven before a predetermined opening deviation period with respect to the time when the opening / closing means starts to move. . In this case, by confirming the drive timing of the driven means, it is possible to grasp the timing before the predetermined opening deviation period when the opening / closing means actually starts to be displaced, so that it is easy to determine the displacement start timing of the opening / closing means. be able to.

  Further, when the opening / closing means starts to be displaced from the open position toward the closed position, the driven means may be driven after a predetermined closing deviation period from the start of displacement of the opening / closing means. In this case, by confirming that the driven means has started operation, it is possible to grasp that the opening / closing means has started to move to the closed position. Thereby, even if it is difficult to see the position of the opening / closing means, the player can stop the launch of the game ball and suppress the ball loss.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the driven means is stopped while the opening / closing means is disposed at the open position.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, a configuration is adopted in which the gaming ball flowing down through the passing means can collide with the driven means when the opening / closing means is in the open position. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the driven means while the driven means is being driven. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the driven means is damaged by the collision of the driven means with the game ball.

  In this case, whether or not the game ball can pass through the passing means due to the displacement of the opening / closing means can be associated with the stop of the driven means. Therefore, even when it is difficult to visually recognize the opening / closing means, it is possible to assume an appropriate timing for launching the game ball by checking the state of the driven means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the driven means is configured to be drivable by the driving force of the driving means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the number of driving means disposed can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A5, the gaming machine A6 is configured such that the mode of operation of the driven means relative to the displacement of the opening / closing means can be changed based on the difference in the displacement mode of the opening / closing means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, a plurality of interlocking variations between the opening and closing means and the driven means can be configured with a single driving means.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a difference in a displacement aspect. For example, it may be the number of times the opening / closing means is displaced, or may be a difference in the distance by which the opening / closing means is displaced.

  In the gaming machine A6, the difference in the displacement mode of the opening / closing means is configured as the number of displacements of the opening / closing means, and the operation mode of the driven means with respect to the opening / closing means periodically changes based on the number of times. A gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the mode of operation of the driven means with respect to the opening / closing means can be configured as a set operation in response to the opening / closing means being displaced a plurality of times.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, a gaming machine A8 is provided with second driving means for generating a driving force for driving the driven means separately from the driving means.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the driven means can be driven in an operating mode including an operating mode that does not depend on the movement of the opening / closing means driven by the driving unit. it can.

  The driven means may be driven by the driving force of the driving means and the second driving means, or may be driven only by the driving force of the second driving means.

  In the gaming machine A8, the direction of the driving force transmitted from the second driving means to the driven means is a direction along the direction of the driving force transmitted from the driving means to the driven means. Characteristic gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A8, it is possible to prevent the driving means and the second driving means from being damaged by the mutual driving force.

<Change the ball flow inside the attacker over time>
A launching device that launches a game ball toward the game area, passing means configured to allow the game ball to pass, an open position where the game ball can pass through the passing means, and the game ball cannot pass through the passing means In a gaming machine comprising: opening / closing means that is displaced between closed positions; and driving means that drives the opening / closing means, detection means configured to be able to detect a game ball that has passed through the passing means, and the passing The game ball that has passed through the means is configured to be able to flow down, is connected to the detection means, and is configured to be able to act on the flow path in which the game ball that has passed is detected by the detection means, and the game ball in the flow down path, A gaming machine B1 comprising: restriction means for restricting a period during which a game ball can pass through the flow path.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that changes a winning efficiency of a winning opening by changing an opening / closing width of an opening / closing means that opens / closes a winning opening (see, for example, JP 2010-220931 A). . However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the winning efficiency at the timing of passing through the opening / closing means can be changed, but the winning efficiency after passing through the opening / closing means cannot be changed. In this case, there is a problem that the winning efficiency cannot be changed in a state where it is kept secret to the player, and there is a possibility that the degree of freedom in production may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the restricting means for restricting the period during which the game ball can pass through the flow path is arranged in the flow path, the detection means does not change the efficiency of entering the passing means. It is possible to change the efficiency of entering the ball (winning). Therefore, it is possible to cause a change in the winning efficiency while keeping the player in secret that the change in the winning efficiency has occurred.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a passage means. For example, it may be a specific winning opening that opens and closes in a jackpot game or the like, or a second winning opening that frequently opens and closes in a short time state.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a detection means. For example, a payout sensor with payout may be used, a pass detection sensor for detecting the passage of a game ball without payout may be used, or a V prize sensor for generating a big win game by the passage of the game ball may be used. It is also possible to use a sensor (V probability change sensor) related to the game state (transition to the probability change state).

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a period. For example, it may be a period determined based on the number of game balls that have passed through the passing means, or may be a period determined based on the time elapsed since the opening / closing means is in the open position.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as winning efficiency. For example, it may mean the period of time from when a game ball passes through the passage means until it is detected by the detection means, or among the game balls that have passed through the passage means, the number of balls detected by the detection means May mean.

  In the gaming machine B1, the restriction means changes the flow path width of the flow-down path, the gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the period required for the game ball to pass through the flow path can be changed. Thereby, the flow-down mode of the game ball downstream of the passing means can be changed.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the restricting unit is configured to be driven by the driving force of the driving unit, and the driving start point of the opening / closing unit is different from the driving start point of the limiting unit. Machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the opening / closing means and the limiting means can be visually recognized as operating separately while reducing the number of driving means. . Thereby, the suppression of the product cost of a game machine and the improvement of a production effect can be made compatible.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the restricting means is formed integrally with the opening / closing means, and when the opening / closing means starts displacing to the closed position before the game ball reaches the predetermined position, A gaming machine B4, wherein the flow direction of the game ball in the route is changed to limit a period during which the game ball can pass through the flow route.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, attention to the gaming ball can be maintained even after the gaming ball has passed through the passing means.

  In addition, the aspect of a flow-down path | route is not limited at all. For example, the flow path having a cross-sectional area that allows the game ball to pass through may be configured in a mesh shape, or may be configured as a flow path that is wide enough to allow the game ball to flow down through a random path.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the restricting means changes a passing period required for the gaming ball to pass through the flow-down path.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the player is aware that the function of the limiting means is acting compared to the case where the gaming ball flows down through a completely different route. Can be difficult to recognize.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the restricting means includes a contact portion that can contact a game ball flowing down toward the passing means downstream of the opening and closing means, The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the displacement after the contact is set in a direction away from the passing means.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball that has come into contact with the contact portion of the restricting means from being pushed back to the passing means side. The flow can be made smooth.

<An inclined plate is arranged downstream of the slide plate>
A launching device that launches a game ball toward the game area, passing means configured to allow the game ball to pass, an open position where the game ball can pass through the passing means, and the game ball cannot pass through the passing means An opening / closing means that displaces between the closed positions; and an upstream side of the passing means, and a position that is below the opening / closing means, and is configured to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, Displacement means capable of switching the flow path of the game ball by displacing the first position and the second position, and the opening / closing means is linearly displaced along a predetermined plane, The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the upper surface side of the plane is configured as the flow surface of the game ball, and the displacement means is rotationally displaced corresponding to the displacement of the opening / closing means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that opens and closes a specific winning opening by the displacement of a first opening / closing plate that is linearly displaced and a second opening / closing plate that is rotationally displaced (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-220731). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first opening / closing plate is configured not to hold the game ball, and when the first opening / closing plate is arranged at the open position (position protruding to the front side), the gaming ball is the first. Even if it reaches the opening / closing plate, the game ball passes through the first opening / closing plate, so that the player's expectation as to whether or not the game ball will win and the game result (the winning ball can be obtained) There is a problem that there is a possibility that the dissatisfaction of the player may increase due to a large difference from the above.

  Further, since the second opening / closing plate is disposed at a position where the line of sight is blocked by the first opening / closing plate as seen from the player, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp the state of the second opening / closing plate.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the opening / closing means is configured to include the flow surface of the game ball, the game ball that has reached the opening / closing means can be retained. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the opening / closing means can be easily directed downstream.

  Furthermore, by disposing the displacement means at a position below the opening / closing means so as to be displaced by a rotational operation corresponding to the displacement of the opening / closing means, it is possible to easily recognize that the opening / closing means has been displaced from the player's perspective. .

  The driving force for displacing the opening / closing means and the displacing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be displaced by a load applied from a game ball, may be driven by an individual driving device, may be driven by a dual-purpose driving device, or may be driven by an individual driving device. You may comprise so that switching with the period driven by the combined drive device is possible.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is configured to be able to change a flow path after the game ball passes through the passing means according to a difference in length in which the opening / closing means is maintained in the open position. .

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the flow path of the game ball can be changed by the operating mode of the opening / closing means, so the operating mode of the opening / closing means and the displacement mode of the displacement means The flow path of the game ball can be changed by the combination. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the flow path of the game ball, so that the player's attention to the opening / closing means and the displacing means can be maintained.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a gaming machine C3 is configured such that a flow-down mode of the game ball changes depending on a displacement mode of the opening / closing unit when the game ball reaches the displacement unit.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to maintain high attention to the gaming ball even after the gaming ball has passed the opening / closing means to the passing means side.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the game ball is on the upper surface of the displacement means at the first position and the displacement means is displaced to the second position, the upper surface of the displacement means A game machine C4 configured such that the game ball on which it rides is bounced up and can collide with the ceiling surface.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the flow mode of the game ball riding on the upper surface of the displacement means immediately before the displacement means is displaced to the second position, at other timings. It can be different from the game ball on the upper surface of the displacement means.

  In addition, the aspect of a ceiling surface is not limited at all. For example, the ceiling surface may be a wall surface whose position is always fixed, or may be configured as one surface of a member that can be displaced with the displacement of the opening / closing means.

  In the gaming machine C4, the ceiling surface is displaced as the opening / closing means is displaced.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, it is possible to increase variations in reaction force applied to the gaming ball when the opening / closing means and the gaming ball collide.

  In the gaming machine C 1 or C 2, the gaming machine C 6 is configured so that a path through which the gaming ball passes through the passing means can be changed depending on a position where the gaming ball collides with the opening / closing means or the displacement means. .

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, attention to the way the game ball reaches the opening / closing means or the displacement means can be improved.

  The mode of collision with the opening / closing means or the displacement means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a collision when the game ball flows down, or a collision after the game ball collides with a predetermined part and bounces back.

  In the gaming machine C6, the gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the distance between the displacement means and the inner surface of the passing means arranged to face the displacement means changes due to the difference in the axial position of the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6, the ease of collision of the gaming ball that bounces off the collision with the displacement means to the ceiling surface is changed by the difference in the axial position of the displacement means. Can do. Thereby, the flow-down mode of the game ball can be complicated.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a gaming machine is configured such that a path through which the game ball passes through the passing means can be changed by a difference in a position through which the gaming ball passes when the opening / closing means is in the open position C8.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, variations in the flow-down mode of the gaming ball that has passed through the opening / closing means can be increased, and the gaming ball can be easily adopted as the rendering means.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the gaming machine C9 is configured such that the displacement means can complete the displacement while the opening / closing means is in the closed position.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, it is possible to regulate the arrangement of the game balls when the displacement means is displaced, and the game balls are placed on the displacement means at an unexpected timing. It is possible to prevent a collision or a game ball from being bitten between the displacement means and the surrounding member.

  A gaming machine Z1 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C9, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C9, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C9, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
65a Special winning opening (passing means)
112a Ball launch unit (launch device)
331b Lower passage (part of flow down)
2331e Extension floor (part of the downflow route)
332, 4332 Moving upper lid member (opening / closing means, part of limiting means, part of ceiling surface)
333, 2333 Solenoid (drive means)
2360, 3360, 4360, 6360 Movable presentation member (driven means, part of limiting means, displacement means)
3331k Guide slope (part of flow path)
3370 Sorting part (part of limiting means)
3374 Second restriction portion (contact portion)
510 drive motor (second drive means)
6331m Restriction plate (part of flow down)
S sensor (part of detection means)
S2 Second sensor (part of detection means)
S3 Third sensor (part of detection means)
VC V prize sensor (part of detection means)

Claims (3)

A launching device that launches a game ball toward the game area, passing means configured to allow the game ball to pass, an open position where the game ball can pass through the passing means, and the game ball cannot pass through the passing means In a gaming machine comprising: opening / closing means that is displaced between closed positions, and driving means that drives the opening / closing means.
Detecting means configured to be able to detect the game ball that has passed through the passing means;
A game ball that has passed through the passage means is configured to be able to flow down, is connected to the detection means, and a flow path through which the passed game ball is detected by the detection means,
A gaming machine configured to be capable of acting on a game ball in the flow path, and limiting means for limiting a period during which the game ball can pass through the flow path.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the restricting unit changes a flow path width of the flow-down path.   The said restriction | limiting means is comprised so that a drive is possible with the driving force of the said drive means, The drive start time of the said opening-and-closing means differs from the drive start time of the said restriction | limiting means. Gaming machine.

Images